Download chapter 1 specifications

Technical Manual
CL-S6621
Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer
PZY90003-00
1.00E-1304
Copyright © 2013 by CITIZEN SYSTEMS JAPAN CO., LTD.
CL-S6621
ii
CHAPTER 1
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
CHAPTER 3
DISASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 4
TROUBLESHOOTING
CHAPTER 5
PARTS LISTS
CHAPTER 6
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
APPENDICES
iii
CL-S6621
Safety Precautions
To prevent personal injury or property damage, the following shall be strictly observed.
The degree of possible injury and damage due to incorrect use/maintenance or improperly
following instructions is described below.
Warning
Caution
Indicates a situation which, if not observed and handled properly, could
result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a situation which, if not observed and handled properly, could
result in injury or property damage.
: This is a mark to call attention to the reader.
Warning
• Before starting disassembly/reassembly or mechanical adjustment, be sure to
disconnect the power cord from the power source.
Caution
• Do not disassemble/reassemble or adjust the machine, if it functions properly.
Particularly, do not loosen screws on any component, unless necessary.
• After completing an inspection and before turning on the power, be sure to check that
there is no abnormality.
• Never try to print without media.
• Check that the media is properly set.
• Do not lay anything on the cover or lean against it during maintenance or while the
printer is in operation.
• During maintenance, be careful not to leave parts or screws unattached or loose
inside the printer.
• When handling a printed circuit board, do not use gloves, etc., which can easily
cause static electricity. Since ICs, such as CPU, RAM and ROM, might be destroyed
by static electricity, do not touch lead wires or windows unnecessarily.
• Do not put the printed circuit boards directly on the printer or on the floor.
• When disassembling or reassembling, check wires for any damage and do not pinch
or damage them. Also, run wires as they were.
CL-S6621
iv
CHAPTER 1
SPECIFICATIONS
1-1
CL-S6621
CHAPTER 1 SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
General Specifications .................................................................................................... 1-3
Printable Area ................................................................................................................. 1-8
Printing Position Accuracy .............................................................................................. 1-9
Adjustable Sensors......................................................................................................... 1-10
CL-S6621
1-2
General Specifications
1-1.
General Specifications
Printing
Printing method
Resolution
Max. print width
Max. print length
Print density
Printing speed setting
Print mode
Batch mode
Tear off mode
Cut mode *1
Peel mode*1
Media
Types of media
Thermal transfer/Direct thermal
Main scanning line density: 203 dots/inch (8 dots/mm)
Sub-scanning line density: 203 dots/inch (8 dots/mm)
Head 1344 dots (effective dots: 1344 dots)
168 mm
6.6inch
2539.7 mm
99.99 inch
Print density is adjustable with software
6, 5, 4, 3 or 2 inches per second
Normal printing (single or multiple sheets)
Feeds back media to the tear-off position after printing is completed.
Prints while cutting at designated sheet units.
The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.
• Back feed
• Cut through
(Cut through refers to stopping present printing to cut the previous
label when it reaches the cut position. After cutting, printing restarts
but a gap may be created at the seam of the printing at this time.)
Peels labels from the liners after printing them.
Roll, fanfold
(continuous media, die-cuts, continuous tags, paper or tickets)
Recommended media Thermal transfer: label media (LR1111 Lintec)
Direct thermal media: label media (150LA-1 Ricoh),
tag media (130LHB Ricoh)
Max. media width
178.0 mm
7.01"
Min. media width
50.0 mm
1.97"
Min. label width
50.0 mm
1.97"
2
Min. label pitch*
19.0 mm
0.748"
Max. media thickness 0.254 mm
0.01"
Max. media length
2539.7 mm
99.99"
Min. media length
16.0 mm
0.63"
Min. media thickness 0.0635 mm
0.0025"
On-board roll media
Max. external diameter: 127mm
5"
diameter
Media core: 25.4 to 76mm
1 to 3"
Min. media core external diameter
(when using label media): 50.8 mm
2"
*1: Options can be separately purchased.
*2: When a media pitch of less than 1" is used, set the "Small Media Adjustment" setting in the
"Page Setup" menu to "On".
1-3
CL-S6621
General Specifications
Ribbon
Recommended ribbon B110A Ricoh
Max. ribbon width
174.0 mm
6.85"
Min. ribbon width
50.0 mm
1.97"
Max. ribbon length
360.0 m
1181 ft
Max. roll diameter
74.0 mm
2.90"
Outer diameter of the 33.4±0.50mm
1.31 ± 0.02"
paper core
Inner diameter of the
25.4 ± 0.25 mm
1.00 ± 0.01"
paper core
Ribbon end tape
Max. 80.0 mm
3.15”
length
Ribbon end detection Ribbon out detection by a ribbon sensor
Bar code
For Datamax® emulation*3
One-dimension
• Code 3 of 9 • UPC-A • UPC-E • EAN-13 (JAN-13)
• EAN-8 (JAN-8) • Interleaved 2 of 5 • Code 128
• HIBC (Modulus 43-used code 3 of 9) • Codabar (NW-7)
• Int 2 of 5 (Modulus 10-used Interleaved 2 of 5) • Plessey
• Case Code • UPC 2DIG ADD • UPC 5DIG ADD • Code 93
• Telepen • ZIP • UCC/EAN 128 • UCC/EAN128 (for K-MART)
• UCC/EAN128 Random Weight • FIM
Two-dimension
• UPS Maxi Code • PDF-417 • Data Matrix • QR Code • Aztec
• GS1 DataBar
®
For Zebra emulation*4
One-dimension
• Code 11 • Interleaved 2 of 5 • Code 39 • EAN-8 • UPC-E
• Code 93 • Code 128 • EAN-13 • Industrial 2 of 5
• Standard 2 of 5 • ANSI CODABAR • LOGMARS • MSI • Plessey
• UPC/EAN Extensions • UPC-A • POSTNET • Planet
Two-dimension
• Code 49 • PDF-417 • CODA BLOCK • UPS Maxi Code
• Micro PDF-417 • Data Matrix • QR Code • GS1 DataBar
• TLC39 • Aztec
®
*3: Datamax is a registered trademark of Datamax Bar Code Products Corporation.
*4: Zebra® is a registered trade mark of ZIH Corp.
CL-S6621
1-4
General Specifications
Font
For Datamax® emulation*3
1. Seven kinds of fixed pitch font
Overseas, English fonts and European fonts
2. OCR fonts
OCR-A*5, OCR-B*5
3. Proportional fonts
CG Triumvirate smooth font
CG Triumvirate Bold smooth font
(6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48 points)
• Character set: Conforms with code page 850 standards
4. TrueTypeTM rasterizer *6
For Zebra® emulation*4
1. Five kinds of fixed pitch font
Overseas, English fonts and European fonts
2. OCR fonts
OCR-A*5, OCR-B*5
3. Proportional font
CG Triumvirate Condensed Bold
4. True type™ rasterizer*6
Symbol set
PC866U Ukraina*7, PC Cyrillic, ISO 60 Danish/Norwegian, DeskTop,
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1, ISO 8859/2 Latin 2, ISO 8859/9 Latin 5,
ISO 8859/10 Latin 6, ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek, ISO 8859/15 Latin 9,
ISO 8859/5 Latin/Cyrillic, ISO 69: French, ISO 21: German,
ISO 15: Italian, Legal, Math-8, Macintosh, Math, PC-858 Multilingual,
Microsoft Publishing, PC-8, Code Page 437, PC-8 D/N,
Code Page 437N, PC-852 Latin 2, PC-851 Latin/Greek,
PC-862 Latin/Hebrew, Pi Font, PC-850 Multilingual,
PC-864 Latin/Arabic, PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T, PC-1004,
PC-775 Baltic, Non-UGL, Generic Pi Font, Roman-8, Roman-9,
ISO 17: Spanish, ISO 11: Swedish, Symbol, PS Text,
ISO 4: United Kingdom, ISO 6: ASCII, Ventura International,
Ventura Math, Ventura US, Windows 3.1 Latin 1, Wingdings,
Windows 3.1 Latin 2, Windows 3.1 Baltic (Latv, Lith),
Windows 3.0 Latin 1, Windows Latin/Cyrillic, Windows 3.1 Latin 5
Control language
Conforms to Datamax® programming language*3 and Zebra®
programming language*4
*5: The OCR font may have a low recognition rate according to the reader.
*6: It is equipped with UFSTTM and TrueTypeTM rasterizer that are licensed from Monotype Imaging,
Inc.
TrueTypeTM is a trademark of Apple Inc.
UFSTTM is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc.
*7: "PC866U Ukraina" is available for Datamax® emulation only.
1-5
CL-S6621
General Specifications
Outline of electronic devices
CPU
32-bit RISC CPU
ROM
Standard equipment: FLASH ROM 16MByte (User area: 4MByte)
RAM
Standard equipment: SDRAM 32MByte (User area: 4MByte)
Media detection sensors
Transparent sensor
Detects media gap between labels, notches on tags, and media out
Reflective sensor
Detects reflective mark on back of media and media out
PNE (Paper Near
Detects the near end state of roll paper
End) sensor
(By default, issuing a paper near end alarm is disabled by the menu
settings.)
1
Label peeling sensor * Detects labels that are peeled off.
Communication interfaces
Serial
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps
USB
High-speed USB2.0 (480Mbps)
Communication interface (Options)
Parallel*8
IEEE1284 (Compatible, Nibble, ECP mode)
Network
Wired LAN:
Ethernet interface (10-Base-T/100-Base-TX)
Wireless LAN:
IEEE802.11n/IEEE802.11g/IEEE802.11b
Indications and switches
LED
POWER, PRINT, CONDITION, ERROR
Buzzer
Alarms, errors, etc.
Operating panel keys PAUSE, FEED, STOP, MODE/REPEAT
Head-up detection
Detects head open.
switch
Power switch
Turns power on and off.
Power supply
120V version
120V (-10%+6%), 2.5A, 60Hz (U.S.A., Canada)
UL60950-1st/2nd Edition, CSA No. 950, FCC Part 15 Subpart B
(Class A)
220V version
220V-240V (-10%+6%), 1.5A, 50/60Hz (Europe)
EN60950-1, EN55022 (Class A), EN55024, EN61000-3-2,
EN61000-3-3, CCC GB4943-2001/GB9254-1998/GB17625.1-2003
Power consumption (max. value)
120V version
105W (operation at 6 IPS at 12.5% printing duty)
4.4W (printer standby in Normal mode)
2.3W (printer standby in Standby mode*9)
220V version
105W (operating at 6 IPS at 12.5% printing duty)
5.0W (printer standby in Normal mode)
2.8W (printer standby in Standby mode*9)
*8: This interface is Non-L. P. S. (Limited Power Source).
*9: Standby mode is default OFF.
CL-S6621
1-6
General Specifications
Others
Environment
Operating temperature conditions:
Operating temp. 0 to 40°C, humidity 30 to 80%, condensation free
(Conditions: ventilation, and natural convection)
Storage temperature conditions
Temp. -20 to 60°C, humidity 5 to 85%
(Store the printer with the Head Unit up, without paper installed and
without condensation.)
(Conditions: ventilation, and natural convection)
85
Humidity %
Humidity %
80
40
30
0
5
5
35 40
Temperature °C
Operating assurance temperature
Printing assurance temperature
60
-20
Temperature °C
Storage assurance
temperature
[Operating and printing assurance condition] [Storage assurance condition]
External dimensions
Approx. 303 (W) X 290.1 (D) X 273.2 (H) mm
11.9 (W) X 11.4 (D) X 10.76 (H)"
Weight
Accessories
Approx. 7.9 kg (17.4 lb.)
Test label media, Test ribbon, CD-ROM (User's Manual), Quick start
guide, Head cleaner, Power cord, Media holder bar and Media holder
guide, Ribbon holder, Paper core
Auto-cutter unit, Peeler unit, IEEE1284 Parallel I/F board, Ethernet I/F
board, Wireless LAN I/F board
Option
1-7
CL-S6621
Printable Area
1-2.
Printable Area
The printable area of the printer is as follows:
When media is set to the printer, it must be aligned with the media guide at the left of the printing
mechanism. Though the available maximum media width is 178 mm (7.01"), there are unprintable
areas on both sides: 2.5 mm (0.10") width is on the left side and 7.5 mm (0.30") width on the right
side as shown below.
The left side unprintable area applies for media of any size.
Media guide
Maximum media width: 178 mm (7.01")
Unprintable area
Printable area
168 mm (6.61”)
7.5 mm (0.30")
2.5 mm (0.10")
Reference end
CL-S6621
Direction of media feed
1-8
Printing Position Accuracy
1-3.
Printing Position Accuracy
By default, the printing start position is 2.5 mm (0.10") from the left end of the media and 1 mm
(0.04") backward the leading edge of the label, U-shaped notch, or black mark.
2.5 mm (0.10") is the necessary value to avoid printing in the unprintable area as mentioned in
“Printable Area".
The printing start position can deviate from the ideal position as follows:
Printable area
100 ± 2 mm*4
(39.4 ± 0.08")
2.5 ± 1 mm*3
(0.10 ± 0.04")
Unprintable area
Unprintable area
Maximum media width: 178 mm (7.01")
1 mm (0.04")
Actual printing start position*1
ABCDEFG
1 ± 2 mm*2
(0.04 ± 0.08")
Ideal printing start position
2.5 mm
(0.10")
Direction of media feed
Reference edge
(Paper guide)
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
Actual printing start position. May deviates from the ideal one in the indicated range.
Deviation of vertical positioning when printing position is set to 0.
Deviation of horizontal positioning when printing position is set to 0.
Deviation of vertical printing position when 100 mm is specified from the printing start
position.
1-9
CL-S6621
Adjustable Sensors
1-4.
Adjustable Sensors
There are two media sensors; the upper sensor (transparent sensor) and the bottom sensor
(reflective sensor). The upper sensor is used to detect the labels on the liner or the U-shaped
notches of tag. The bottom sensor is used to detect the black marks on tag. Also, both sensors are
used to detect media end.
The mechanical adjustable range of both sensors is equal and they are adjusted at the same time
by turning the blue knob (“Gear Bevel Lead Screw U”).
For details about the media sensors, refer to “2-1-3 Label/Tag Detection Mechanism".
Media guide
Center
4.8 to 88.9 mm
(0.19 to 3.5")
(Moveable range of the
transparent sensor)
2.7 to 86.8 mm
(0.11 to 3.42")
2.5 mm
(0.10")
Media
Printable area
168 mm (6.61”)
Maximum media width: 178 mm (7.01")
Direction of media feed
CL-S6621
1-10
Unprintable area
Unprintable area
(Moveable range of the
reflective sensor)
7.5 mm
(0.30")
CHAPTER 2
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
2-1
CL-S6621
CHAPTER 2
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism ....................................................................................... 2-4
2-1-1. Locations and Functions of Motors, Sensors and Thermal Head ...................... 2-4
(1) “Unit, Ribbon” section ................................................................................ 2-4
(2) Printing section .......................................................................................... 2-5
2-1-2. Media Feed Mechanism..................................................................................... 2-6
2-1-3. Label/Tag Detection Mechanism ........................................................................ 2-7
2-1-4. Printing and Ribbon Feed Mechanism ............................................................... 2-10
2-1-5. Print Head Up/Down Detection Mechanism....................................................... 2-13
2-1-6. Paper Near End Detection Mechanism.............................................................. 2-14
2-1-7. Head Balance Adjustment Mechanism .............................................................. 2-15
2-1-8. Media Offset Adjustment Mechanism................................................................. 2-16
2-1-9. Transparent/Reflective Sensor Travelling Mechanism ....................................... 2-17
2-2. Operation of Control Parts .............................................................................................. 2-18
2-2-1. Configuration of Printer ...................................................................................... 2-18
(1) AC power supply ....................................................................................... 2-19
(2) SA, Main PCB............................................................................................ 2-19
(3) Operation panel (SA, Opepane PCB)........................................................ 2-20
(4) Thermal print head (SA, Head).................................................................. 2-20
(5) Sensors ..................................................................................................... 2-20
(6) Motors........................................................................................................ 2-20
(7) SA, Ribbon PCB ........................................................................................ 2-20
(8) SA, Relay PCB .......................................................................................... 2-21
(9) Optional I/F ................................................................................................ 2-21
2-2-2. Memory map ...................................................................................................... 2-22
2-2-3. Sensors .............................................................................................................. 2-23
(1) Head up switch .......................................................................................... 2-23
(2) Transparent sensor and reflective sensor ................................................. 2-24
(3) Ribbon Sensor F/R .................................................................................... 2-26
(4) Head temperature sensor.......................................................................... 2-27
(5) PF motor temperature sensor.................................................................... 2-28
(6) Ribbon motor temperature sensor............................................................. 2-29
(7) Paper Near End sensor ............................................................................. 2-30
2-2-4. Drivers................................................................................................................ 2-31
(1) PF motor driver.......................................................................................... 2-31
(2) Ribbon motor driver ................................................................................... 2-32
(3) Head driver ................................................................................................ 2-33
(4) Buzzer driver ............................................................................................. 2-35
(5) Fan driver .................................................................................................. 2-35
2-2-5. Other circuits ...................................................................................................... 2-36
(1) Power supply circuit................................................................................... 2-36
(2) Reset circuit............................................................................................... 2-37
(3) Clock circuit ............................................................................................... 2-37
CL-S6621
2-2
(4) Ope-pane circuit ........................................................................................ 2-38
(5) USB I/F control circuit................................................................................ 2-38
(6) RS232C I/F circuit ..................................................................................... 2-39
(7) Option I/F circuit ........................................................................................ 2-39
(8) Peeler circuit (for optional peeler).............................................................. 2-40
(9) Cutter control circuit (for optional cutter) ................................................... 2-41
2-3. Operation Panel.............................................................................................................. 2-43
2-3-1. External view...................................................................................................... 2-43
(1) Keys........................................................................................................... 2-43
(2) LEDs.......................................................................................................... 2-43
2-3-2. Operation using the keys ................................................................................... 2-44
(1) Normal operation ....................................................................................... 2-44
(1-1) Sensor adjustment mode .................................................................. 2-44
(1-2) Menu setting mode ........................................................................... 2-45
(2) Test mode .................................................................................................. 2-46
(2-1) Self print mode.................................................................................. 2-46
(2-2) Hex dump mode................................................................................ 2-47
(3) Factory/Service mode................................................................................ 2-47
(3-1) General ............................................................................................. 2-47
(3-2) How to enter the Factory/Service Mode............................................ 2-48
(3-3) Factory/Service Mode menu table .................................................... 2-54
2-4. Interface.......................................................................................................................... 2-59
2-4-1. Serial Interface ................................................................................................... 2-59
(1) Specifications............................................................................................. 2-59
(2) Signal line and pin assignment.................................................................. 2-59
(3) Protocol ..................................................................................................... 2-60
2-4-2. USB Interface..................................................................................................... 2-61
(1) Specifications............................................................................................. 2-61
(2) Signal line and pin arrangement................................................................ 2-61
2-4-3. Parallel Interface (Option) .................................................................................. 2-61
(1) Specifications............................................................................................. 2-61
(2) Signal line and pin assignment.................................................................. 2-62
(3) Parallel port status signals when an error occurs ...................................... 2-62
(4) Compatible timing specification ................................................................. 2-63
2-3
CL-S6621
Operation of Each Mechanism
2-1.
Operation of Each Mechanism
This printer is a thermal transfer barcode & label printer comprised of the following mechanisms:
media feed, ribbon feed, label/tag detection, print head up/down detection, paper near end
detection, head balance adjustment, media thickness adjustment and transparent/reflective sensor
travel.
This section describes the operation of each of these mechanisms.
2-1-1. Locations and Functions of Motors, Sensors and Thermal Head
This printer has the following motors, sensors and thermal head.
(1) “Unit, Ribbon” section
Part name
Description
SA Ribbon Motor F
This motor takes up ribbon. A thermistor is attached to the side of
(Front side)
this motor to detect the motor temperature.
SA Ribbon Motor R
This motor gives back tension to ribbon.
(Rear side)
Ribbon Sensor F
This sensor consists of two photointerrupters to detect if appropriate
(“SA, Ribbon Sensor” tension is given to the front side ribbon.
on the front side)
It also detects a ribbon-running error.
Ribbon Sensor R
This sensor consists of two photointerrupters to detect if appropriate
(“SA, Ribbon Sensor” tension is given to the rear side ribbon.
on the rear side)
It also detects the ribbon end status.
SA Ribbon Motor R
SA Ribbon Motor F
Ribbon Sensor R
("SA, Ribbon Sensor" on the rear side)
Ribbon Sensor F
("SA, Ribbon Sensor" on the front side)
CL-S6621
2-4
Operation of Each Mechanism
(2) Printing section
Part name
Description
SA PF Motor
This motor feeds media. A thermistor is attached to the side surface of this
motor to detect the motor temperature.
SA, Head Up Switch This switch is a mechanical lever switch to detect the print head position;
up or down.
Transparent Sensor This sensor is a photo sensor to detect the labels stuck on liner or
(Upper sensor)
U-shaped notches on tag. It also detects the media end.
(SA TRA Sen PCB)
Reflective Sensor
This sensor is a photo sensor to detect the black marks on tag. It also
(Bottom sensor)
detects the media end.
(SA Ref Sen PCB)
SA, Head
It consists of a head driver and thermal elements. Thermal elements are
heated to make printing on media. The thermal head incorporates a
thermistor to detect the thermal head temperature.
SA PNE Sensor
This sensor is a photo sensor to detect a near end status of roll paper
(Paper near end
installed.
sensor)
SA, Head
SA PNE Sensor
Transparent sensor
(SA TRA Sen PCB)
Reflective Sensor
(SA Ref Sen PCB)
SA PF Motor
SA, Head Up Switch
2-5
CL-S6621
Operation of Each Mechanism
2-1-2. Media Feed Mechanism
The major components of the media feed mechanism are:
(a) SA PF Motor
(b) SA2_Platen
(c) Gear train
By setting the head block to the down position, media is pushed against the “SA2_Platen” by the
“SA, Head”.
As the “SA PF Motor” (stepping motor) turns counterclockwise viewing from the right side of the
printer, the “SA2_Platen” turns counterclockwise via the gear train (“Gear Reduction PF 1”, “Gear
Reduction PF 2” and “Gear Idle PF”) and media is fed forward by the friction force produced
between the “SA2_Platen” and the “SA, Head”.
When the “SA PF Motor” turns clockwise, media is fed backwards.
One step of the “SA PF Motor” feeds media by 1/16 mm (0.0025").
Thermal Elements
SA, Head
Ribbon
6
6
Media
5
SA2_Platen
Gear Idle PF
Gear Reduction PF 2
Gear Reduction PF 1
4
3
2
1
Motor Gear
[Right side view]
CL-S6621
2-6
SA PF Motor
Operation of Each Mechanism
2-1-3. Label/Tag Detection Mechanism
The major components of the label/tag detection mechanism are:
(a) Reflective sensor (Bottom sensor) (SA Ref Sen PCB)
(b) Transparent sensor (Upper sensor) (SA TRA Sen PCB)
There are two movable sensors, the reflective sensor (bottom sensor) and the transparent sensor
(upper sensor). As you adjust the sensor position with the blue knob (“Gear Bevel Lead Screw U”),
both sensors move at the same time.
As shown in the figure below, the reflective sensor has two LEDs and one phototransistor. The
reflective sensor is used to detect black marks at the back of tag. On the other hand, the
transparent sensor is a phototransistor that will receive the transparent light from the LEDs through
the media. The transparent sensor is used to detect labels on liner or U-shaped notches of tag.
Both reflective and transparent sensors are used to detect the media end.
Aligning the sensors for label paper or tag with U-shaped notches:
For label paper, turn the blue knob (“Gear Bevel Lead Screw U”) to align the mark of the
transparent sensor at the center of label. (The transparent sensor and the reflective sensor move
at the same time.) For tags with U-shaped notches, turn it to align the mark with the U-shaped
notch.
Aligning the reflective sensor for tag with black marks:
For tag with black marks, turn the blue knob (“Gear Bevel Lead Screw U”) to align the left side
mark of the reflective sensor with the black mark of tag.
' " & %
&
!
%
&
!
"#$
&
&
&
2-7
CL-S6621
Operation of Each Mechanism
Detecting labels: (Media Sensor menu: “See Through”)
For detecting label, both reflective sensor and transparent sensor are used. Label paper passes
between both sensors. The light emitted from the LEDs of the reflective sensor passes through the
liner (base part of label paper) where no label is stuck on it, and the light reaches the transparent
sensor. Accordingly, the phototransistor of the transparent sensor turns ON. Meanwhile, in the
label part, the light is blocked by label and does not reach the phototransistor. So, the
phototransistor turns OFF. By sensing the output of the transparent sensor, the CPU on the Main
PCB can detect the label leading edge for printing.
Detecting U-shaped notches of tag: (Media Sensor menu: “See Through”)
For detecting U-shaped notches of tag, both reflective sensor and transparent sensor are used.
The U-shaped notches are detected in the same way as the label mentioned above, except that
the light is directly falls on the transparent sensor through the notch.
Detecting black marks on tag: (Media Sensor menu: “Reflect”)
For detecting black marks on tag, only the reflective sensor is used. Light emitted from the LEDs is
reflected by the tag (at other than the black mark) and reaches the phototransistor of the reflective
sensor. At the black mark, the light is not reflected. The CPU on the Main PCB detects the black
mark by sensing the output of the reflective sensor.
Tag
Label
U-shaped
notch
Label
Media
Black mark
Label gap
Liner
Transparent and Reflective sensors
Reflective sensor
Transparent sensor
Sensor to be
used
Media Sensor
menu
CL-S6621
Media
Media
LEDs
Reflective sensor
LEDs
Reflective sensor
See Trough
Reflect
2-8
Operation of Each Mechanism
Detecting continuous media: (Media Sensor menu: “None”)
For detecting continuous media, only the reflective sensor is used. In this case, only media end is
detected by the reflective sensor.
LED light amount control:
According to the media selected by the Media Sensor menu (“See Through”, “Reflect”, or “None”),
the amount of light is well controlled to detect the label/U-shaped notch, black mark, or continuous
media. The amount of light is as follows (the largest amount is for “See Through):
• Continuous media (None) < Black mark (Reflect) < Label/U-shaped notch (See Through)
2-9
CL-S6621
Operation of Each Mechanism
2-1-4. Printing and Ribbon Feed Mechanism
The major components of the printing and ribbon feed mechanism are:
(a) SA, Head
(d) SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F/R
(b) SA Ribbon Motor F/R
(e) SA, Ribbon Sensor (Front/Rear)
(c) Ribbon gear train
Ink ribbon is set to the printer using the ribbon holders. Ribbon is supplied from the supply reel and
is taken up by the take-up reel with adequate ribbon tension, via the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R”
and “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F”. The “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F/R” is always pushed outward
by the internal springs, and, when ribbon slacks, it moves outward. When ribbon tightens, it moves
inward. (Refer to the figures on the later pages.)
The same ribbon sensor is installed on the front and rear sides. The ribbon sensor on the front side
is used to detect the position of the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” (i.e., the ribbon tension on the
front side). While, the ribbon sensor on the rear side is used to detect the position of the “SA,
Ribbon Tension Shaft R” (i.e., the ribbon tension on the rear side).
The ribbon sensor on the front side is also used to detect a ribbon running condition, and that on
the rear side is used to detect the ribbon end.
On the front side, the “SA Ribbon Motor F” turns to take up ribbon. On the rear side, the “SA
Ribbon Motor R” turns to supply ribbon, while applying adequate back tension to ribbon to
eliminate ribbon slack.
Supply Side
Take-up Side
Gear Ribbon Shaft F
SA Ribbon Motor R
Gear Reduction Ribbon 1
Gear Ribbon Shaft R
SA Ribbon Motor F
Gear Reduction Ribbon 1
Gear Reduction Ribbon 2
Gear Reduction Ribbon 3
SA, Ribbon Tension
Shaft F
Gear Idle Ribbon
Gear Idle Ribbon
Gear Reduction Ribbon 3
Ribbon
Thermal Head
Gear Reduction Ribbon 2
SA, Ribbon Tension
Shaft R
Media
SA2_Platen
[Front]
Printing:
When printing with ink ribbon, ink on the ribbon is melted by the heated thermal element of the “SA,
Head” and is transferred on the media surface.
CL-S6621
2-10
Operation of Each Mechanism
Taking up Ribbon:
Ribbon will be taken up on the front side as follows:
(1) As media is fed, ribbon is also fed by the friction force produced between media and the “SA,
Head”.
(2) Ribbon slacks and the ribbon sensor on the front side turns OFF as the “SA, Ribbon Tension
Shaft F” is pushed outward.
(3) The “SA Ribbon Motor F” starts to turn and ribbon is taken up.
(4) Ribbon tightens and the ribbon sensor on the front side turns ON. Then, the “SA Ribbon Motor
F” stops.
Supplying Ribbon:
On the rear side, the “SA Ribbon Motor R” turns to supply ribbon, while applying adequate back
tension. In the same way as on the front side, the ribbon sensor on the rear side detects the ribbon
tension to keep the ribbon tension constant. However, when printing is made and ribbon is fed, the
ribbon sensor on the rear side turns ON since ribbon is tightened at this time.
Reel Drive Mechanism:
Though the ribbon holders are directly installed in the reels, ribbon is connected to the reels via the
spring mechanism of the ribbon holders. This means that ribbon is taken up via the spring
mechanism when the “SA Ribbon Motor F”/”SA Ribbon Motor R” turns.
On the front side, the “SA Ribbon Motor F” turns in the clockwise direction viewing from the right
side of the printer, and the “Gear Ribbon Shaft F” (take-up reel) turns in the counterclockwise
direction via the “Gear Reduction Ribbon 1”, “Gear Reduction Ribbon 2”, “Gear Reduction Ribbon
3” and “Gear Idle Ribbon”. Thus, ribbon is taken up.
On the rear side, the “SA Ribbon Motor R” turns in the counterclockwise direction, and the “Gear
Ribbon Shaft R” (supply reel) turns in the clockwise direction via the “Gear Reduction Ribbon 1”,
“Gear Reduction Ribbon 2”, “Gear Reduction Ribbon 3” and “Gear Idle Ribbon”, Ribbon”. Thus,
ribbon is supplied.
2-11
CL-S6621
Operation of Each Mechanism
Detecting Ribbon Tension (Ribbon Sensors):
The same ribbon sensor is installed on the front and rear sides. Since the operation is the same on
both sides, the front side operation is explained here:
When ribbon is taken up, the ribbon tightens and the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” is pushed
inward (in the direction of “a”) by the ribbon. At this time, the claws “A” attached to the “SA, Ribbon
Tension Shaft F” are inserted into the photointerrupters of the “SA, Ribbon Sensor”, and the
photointerrupters turn OFF.
During printing, the ribbon is fed forward together with media and the ribbon will slack. This, the
“SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” is moved outward (in the direction of “b”) by the spring (“B”) force,
and the claws “A” come off the photointerrupters. So, the photointerrupters turn ON and the “SA
Ribbon Motor F” turns faster to take up the ribbon quickly. Then, the claws “A” are inserted into the
photointerrupters again, and the “SA Ribbon Motor F” resumes normal speed.
This cycle is repeated and constant tension is applied to the ribbon.
(The two claws “A” are arranged so that they are inserted into or released from the
photointerrupters with a slightly different timing. This function enables to finely control the ribbon
tension.)
On the rear side, during printing, ribbon will be tightened. If it is tightened, the ribbon sensor turns
ON and the “SA Ribbon Motor R” turns faster than normal speed to quickly supply ribbon.
Ribbon Sensor
SA, Ribbon Sensor
A
Supporting Point
Tension Adjustment
Knob (Front)
[Right side view]
b
A
a
Ribbon
B
Spring Ribbon
Tension (2 pcs.)
SA, Ribbon
Tension Shaft F
Ribbon
Tension Adjustment
Knob (Rear)
Tension Adjustment Mechanism:
To apply adequate ribbon tension, you can change the spring “B” force as follows:
The spring force is adjustable in 3 steps with the “Tension Adjustment Knob (Front/Rear)”. As you
move the knob toward the T mark, the spring force becomes stronger since the spring “B” is
moved to the left in the above figure.
CL-S6621
2-12
Operation of Each Mechanism
2-1-5. Print Head Up/Down Detection Mechanism
The component of the print head up/down detection mechanism is as follows:
(a) SA, Head Up Switch
(b) Pop Up Cover Frame
(c) Spring Pop Up
(d) Support Pop Up
The print head up/down detection mechanism detects the up (open)/down (close) status of the
“Unit, Head”.
When the “Unit, Head” is in the down position, the “Support Pop Up” (a part of the “Unit, Head”)
pushes down the top of the “Pop Up Cover Frame”, and the lever of the “SA, Head Up Switch” is
pushed. In this state, the “SA, Head Up Switch” turns ON and the signal line is in “Low” level.
While, the “Unit, Head” is in the up position, since the “Pop Up Cover Frame” is released from the
“Support Pop Up”, it pops up by the force of “Spring Pop Up” and the switch lever is set free. In this
state, the “SA, Head Up Switch” turns OFF and the signal line is in “High” level.
The CPU on the Main PCB detects up or down position of the “Unit, Head” by sensing the output of
the “SA, Head Up Switch.
Unit, Head
["Unit, Head" Down Position]
Support Pop Up
Pop Up Cover Frame
Support Pop Up
ON
SA, Head Up Switch
Spring Pop Up
["Unit, Head" Up Position]
Pop Up Cover Frame
SA, Head Up Switch
Spring Pop Up
OFF
2-13
CL-S6621
Operation of Each Mechanism
2-1-6. Paper Near End Detection Mechanism
The component of the Paper near end detection mechanism is as follows:
(a) SA PNE Sensor (A part of the main body)
(b) Lever PNE (A part of the “Roll Paper Holder”)
(c) Slider PNE (A part of the “Roll Paper Holder”)
(d) Spring PNE (A part of the “Roll Paper Holder”)
The paper near end sensor is used to detect a paper near end status of roll paper installed in the
printer.
The knob of the “Lever PNE” is pushed by the side of roll paper and the “Slider PNE” engages with
the “SA PNE Sensor” (fixed part on the main body). In this state, the “SA PNE Sensor”
(photointerrupter) turns OFF.
When printing proceeds and the diameter of roll paper is reduced to the preset paper near end
point, the knob of the “Lever PNE” that was pushed by the roll paper pops up, and the “Slider PNE”
comes off the “SA PNE Sensor”. In this state, the “SA PNE Sensor” (photointerrupter) turns ON.
The CPU on the Main PCB detects the ON/OFF status of the “SA PNE Sensor” (photointerrupter)
and judges if the roll paper reaches the near end status.
The paper near end position can be changed mechanically by sliding the knob of the “Lever PNE”
up or down.
[Normal Status]
[PNE (Paper Near End) Status]
Roll Paper Holder
Lever PNE
Spring PNE
SA PNE Sensor
Roll Paper
Spring PNE
Lever PNE
SA PNE Sensor
Roll Paper
Slider PNE
CL-S6621
Slider PNE
2-14
Operation of Each Mechanism
2-1-7. Head Balance Adjustment Mechanism
The major components of the head balance adjustment mechanism are:
(a) Cam Head Balance
(c) Spring Head L/R
(b) Plate Head Balance
The head balance adjustment mechanism is used to eliminate uneven printing density on media.
The head balance adjustment is accomplished by changing the right side head pressure according
to media width to be used. To adjust, the blue Media width adjustment dial (“Cam Head Balance”)
is used. When narrow width media is used, the dial should be set toward “0” to give weaker
pressure. While, wide width media is used, it should be set toward “9” to give stronger pressure.
When narrow width media is used (need to give weak pressure):
The “Spring Head L” and “Spring Head R” (2 pcs.) act to press the “SA, Head” against the
“SA2_Platen”. For narrow width media, if the same pressure is given on both sides, since no media
exists on the right side of the “SA, Head”, the “SA, Head” will slant to the right, resulting in uneven
printing density. The part “A” of the “Plate Head Balance” is pushed against the cam part of the
“Cam Head Balance” by the force of “Spring Head R” and it moves up step by step () as the
Media width adjustment dial is turned toward “0” (). As it moves up, the “Spring Head R” is
pressed with weaker force by the “Plate Head Balance” (), and the right side pressure against
the “SA, Head” decreases, resulting in even printing density. You need to align the dial number
according to the media width to be used. (Smaller number for narrower media)
When wide width media is used (need to give strong pressure):
The same principle applies to wide media. However, in this case, the Media width adjustment dial
should be turned toward “9”. Then the part “A” of the “Plate Head Balance” moves down to apply
stronger pressure to the “SA, Head”. (Larger number for wider media)
For narrow media
Spring Head L
(Fixed)
Supporting point
Spring Head R Weak
(Movable)
Toward "0"
Plate Head
Balance
SA, Head
Ribbon
Media (Narrow width)
For wide media
A
SA2_Platen
Strong
Cam Head Balance
(Media Width Adjustment
Dial)
T0ward "9"
SA, Head
Ribbon
Media (Wide width)
2-15
CL-S6621
Operation of Each Mechanism
2-1-8. Media Offset Adjustment Mechanism
The major components of the media thickness adjustment mechanism are:
(a) Cam Head Adjust
(c) Spring Head Holder
(b) SA Head Adjust Lever
(d) Plate Holder Head
According to the softness of media, the thermal element position is displaced from the optimum
position. The head offset adjustment mechanism is used to correct this by moving the “SA Head”
back and forth a little. By performing the head adjustment properly, optimum printing quality is
obtained. (When shipping, the Media thickness adjustment dial is set to “1” for soft media.)
When soft media is used (thin thermal paper, label paper, etc.):
When soft media is used, the optimum position of the thermal elements will be nearly right above
the center of the “SA2_ Platen”. (In dial No. “1”, they are aligned with the platen center.)
When hard media is used (tag paper):
When hard media is used, the optimum position of the thermal elements will shift toward the front a
little from the center of the “SA2_Platen”, i.e. toward the left viewing from the right side of the
“SA2_ Platen” as shown below. As the optimum position varies according to the hardness of media,
it is necessary to adjust the Media thickness adjustment dial from “1” to up to “9” for optimum
printing. As the dial is turned (), the “SA Head Adjust Lever” swings up and down () as its
projection “A” moves along the groove of the dial.
The “Plate Holder Head” end is pinched by the “Spring Head Holder” at end “B” of the “SA, Head
Adjust Lever”. (Namely, both parts are connected via the “Spring Head Holder”.)
Therefore, as the “SA, Head Adjust Lever” swings up and down (), the “Plate Holder Head”
swings up and down accordingly (). With this movement of the “Plate Holder Head”, the thermal
element position slightly moves back and forth against the “SA2_Platen”.
[Section "B" upside-down view]
[Right side view]
For soft media
Supporting
point
SA Cover Frame (Fixed)
Plate Holder Head B
Ribbon
0
B
Spring Head Holder
SA Head Adjust Lever
0
Media
SA2_Platen
Groove
SA, Head
9
B
For hard media
A
Supporting
point
9
9
0
Cam Head Adjust
(Media Thickness Adjustment Dial)
CL-S6621
2-16
Operation of Each Mechanism
2-1-9. Transparent/Reflective Sensor Travelling Mechanism
The major components of the transparent/reflective sensor travelling mechanism are:
(a) Gear Bevel Lead Screw U (Blue)
(d) Shaft Lead Screw (Upper/Lower)
(b) Gear Lead Screw L
(e) Holder Sensor Adjust U (Transparent sensor)
(c) Gear train
(f) Holder Sensor Adjust L (Reflective Sensor)
The transparent sensor is incorporated in the “Holder Sensor Adjust U” and the reflective sensor is
incorporated in the “Holder Sensor Adjust L”. Both sensor housings move to the right and left
simultaneously by turning the “Gear Bevel Lead Screw U” (blue).
Note that the sensor housings (“Holder Sensor Adjust U” and “Holder Sensor Adjust L”) are
engaged with the groove of respective “Shaft Lead Screw” (upper and lower). Therefore, they
move horizontally when the “Shaft Lead Screw” (upper and lower) turns.
When the “Gear Bevel Lead Screw U” (blue) turns in the direction as shown by the arrow (), the
“Screw Lead Screw” (upper) turns (“a”) and the “Holder Sensor Adjust U” moves to the right (“a’ ”).
At this time, via the gears (() and ()), the “Gear Lead Screw L” turns in the direction shown by
the arrow (), and the “Screw Lead Screw” (lower) turns (“b”) and the “Holder Sensor Adjust L”
moves to the right (“b’ “).
When the “Gear Bevel Lead Screw U” (blue) is turned reversely, the sensor housings move to the
left.
Gear Lead Screw L
Gear Bevel Lead Screw U (Blue)
a
b
Shaft Lead Screw
(Upper)
Shaft Lead Screw
(Lower)
a’
Holder Sensor Adjust U
(Transparent Sensor)
b’
Holder Sensor Adjust L
(Reflective Sensor)
2-17
CL-S6621
Operation of Control Parts
2-2.
Operation of Control Parts
2-2-1. Configuration of Printer
The following shows major configuration blocks.
(Option)
Auto Cutter
CUTTER PCB
(PPS00065-*)
DC Motor
Driver
Cutter Motor
AC Power Supply
PWT20005-* (100V)
PWT20006-* (200V)
Cutter
Position
Sensor
Cutter Motor
Temp. Sensor
SA, MAIN PCB (PPS00058-*)
(Option) Peeler
Peel Sensor
CPU
Head Up Switch
[SA, Head Up Switch]
UPD703111BGJ-13-UEV-A
128MHz
Adjustable Paper Sensors
Transparent Sensor
[SA TRA Sen PCB]
Reflective Sensor
[SA Ref Sen PCB]
USB 2.0
(High Speed)
C.G.
F-ROM (64Mbits)
S-DRAM (256Mbits)
Paper Near End Sensor
[SA PNE Sensor]
Thermal Print Head
(203dpi)
[SA, Head]
FPGA
EP2C5F256C8N
Operation Panel
(SWx4/LEDx4)
Stepping Motor
Driver
[SA, Opepane PCB]
(JM66720-*)
Ribbon Sensor F
[SA, Ribbon Sensor]
Ribbon Sensor R
[SA, Ribbon Sensor]
SA, Relay PCB
(PPS00060-*)
(Option)
Interface Board
IEEE1284
Fan
Driver
Ethernet I/F
(Standard type)
Ribbon Motor Temp. Sensor
[SA Ribbon Motor F]
CL-S6621
USB2.0
Controller
Buzzer
PF Motor Temp. Sensor
[SA PF Motor]
SA Ribbon Motor F
SA Ribbon Motor R
RS232C
Control / C.G.
F-ROM (64Mbits)
Thermal Head Temp. Sensor
[SA, Head]
Fan
RS232C
Driver/Receiver
Stepping Motor
Driver x 2
Ethernet I/F
(Multi-function type)
SA, Ribbon PCB
(PPS00059-*)
Wi-Fi I/F
2-18
SA PF Motor
Operation of Control Parts
Major functions of individual components are described below:
(1) AC power supply
Consists of a fuse, a filter circuit to eliminate external electric noise, and a switching type
regulator to transform an AC input to +24V DC output required to drive the printer.
(2) SA, Main PCB
Controls the entire operations of the printer. It consists of CPU, Flash ROM, S-DRAM, FPGA
(Field-Programmable Gate Array), driver circuits, etc.
(a) CPU
The CPU is a microprocessor with 32-bit architecture. The clock fed to the CPU is 16 MHz.
The CPU internally multiplies this 16 MHz by 8 times and uses 128 MHz clock. The CPU
includes cache memory, RAMs, DMA controller, serial I/F, USB function controller, A/D
converter, etc.
(b) Flash ROM
A flash ROM of 64M bits (8M bytes) that stores the firmware and CG (character generator)
(c) S-DRAM (Synchronous dynamic RAM)
An S-DRAM of 256M bits (32M bytes) that is used as working area, input buffer and
download buffer.
(d) FPGA
The FPGA (Field-Programmable Gate Array) incorporates a control circuit for the interface
I/O port, motors, print head, etc.
(e) Serial I/F (RS-232C Driver/Receiver)
This is a circuit to transmit and receive serial data between the printer and the host.
Serial I/F, USB I/F, Parallel I/F (Option), Wired LAN (Option) or Wireless LAN (Option) is
automatically selected when data is received.
(f) USB I/F (High-speed USB2.0 Controller)
This is a circuit to transmit and receive serial data between the printer and the host using
the high-speed USB2.0 I/F.
Serial I/F, USB I/F, Parallel I/F (Option), Wired LAN (Option) or Wireless LAN (Option) is
automatically selected when data is received.
(g) Stepping motor driver
This is a circuit to drive the “SA PF Motor”. The “SA PF Motor” is a stepping motor.
(h) Buzzer
The buzzer is driven when an alarm, etc. occurs.
2-19
CL-S6621
Operation of Control Parts
(3) Operation panel (SA, Opepane PCB)
Used to indicate the operating status of the printer and to set specifications. It consists of 4
keys and 4 LEDs.
(4) Thermal print head (SA, Head)
Makes printing on paper. The number of thermal elements (dots) is as follows. The thermal
print head includes the print head driver circuit.
•1344 dots
(5) Sensors
The following 9 sensors are used in the printer:
Sensor name
Description
Head Up Switch
A mechanical lever switch.
(SA, Head Up Switch)
Transparent Sensor
A photo sensor using a phototransistor. (On the “SA
TRA Sen PCB”.)
Reflective Sensor
A photo sensor consisting of 2 LEDs and 1
phototransistor. (On the “SA Ref Sen PCB”.)
Ribbon Sensor F
Photo sensors (2 pcs.) using photointerrupters.
(Located on the “SA, Ribbon Sensor” on the front side.)
Ribbon Sensor R
Photo sensors (2 pcs.) using photointerrupters.
(Located on the “SA, Ribbon Sensor” on the rear side.)
Thermal Head Temperature
A thermistor incorporated in the “SA, Head”.
Sensor
PF Motor Temperature Sensor
A thermistor attached to the “SA PF Motor”.
Ribbon Motor Temperature Sensor A thermistor attached to the “SA Ribbon Motor F” (the
front side of ribbon motor).
Paper Near End Sensor
A photo sensor using a photointerrupter. (On the “SA
PNE Sensor”.)
(6) Motors
Three motors are used.
- The “SA PF Motor” is a stepping motor to feed media.
- The “SA Ribbon Motor F” and “SA Ribbon Motor R” are stepping motors to take up and
supply ribbon, respectively.
(7) SA, Ribbon PCB
Controls the operations of the “Unit, Ribbon”.
(a) Stepping motor driver
This is a circuit to drive the “SA Ribbon Motor F” on the front side for taking up ribbon and
the “SA Ribbon Motor R” on the rear side for supplying ribbon. Both are stepping motors.
CL-S6621
2-20
Operation of Control Parts
(b) Fan driver
This is a fan drive circuit. The fan is used to cool both “SA Ribbon Motor F” and “SA
Ribbon Motor R”. When the temperature of the “SA Ribbon Motor F” exceeds a certain
value, the fan starts to rotate.
(8) SA, Relay PCB
Relays the signals between the “SA, Main PCB” and an optional I/F board.
(9) Optional I/F
(a) Parallel I/F (IEEE1284) (Option)
This is the parallel I/F to transmit and receive parallel data between the printer and the host.
It supports Centronics Compatible mode, NIBBLE mode and ECP mode.
Parallel I/F, serial I/F, or USB I/F is automatically selected when data is received.
(b) Wired LAN I/F (Option)
This is a circuit which supports Ethernet protocol. LAN connection is possible.
(c) Wireless LAN I/F (Option)
This is a circuit which supports wireless LAN protocol (IEEE802.11n/IEEE802.11g/
EEE802.11b).
2-21
CL-S6621
Operation of Control Parts
2-2-2. Memory map
0000000H
001FFFFH
Command RAM
(Built-in CPU)
CPU
0100000H
0103FFFH
0104000H
0105FFFH
0106000H
0107FFFH
0108000H
011FFFFH
0120000H
030FFFFH
0310000H
04FFFFFH
0710000H
074FFFFH
07E0000H
07EFFFFH
07F0000H
07FFFFFH
0800000H
Boot Loader (1)
Setting Information
(User Settings)
Setting Information
(Factory-set Settings)
Boot Loader (2)
Firmware (Datamax)
Firmware (Zebra)
8M bytes
Flash ROM
FPGA Data
Service Information (Backup)
Service Information
Firmware (about 400K bytes)
Receiving Buffer (16K bytes x 4)*
Command Buffer (128K bytes)
Others
27FFFFFH
8000000H
80FFFFFH
C000000H
C3FFFFFH
C400000H
C7FFFFFH
F800000H
F8FFFFFH
FFFB000H
I/O
CL-S6621
*: 16K bytes for each I/F
(USB, IEEE1284, Serial,
USB for optional I/F)
FPGA
Download Area (4MByte)
FROM
8MByte
Kanji Font (4MByte)
I/O
USB2.0 Controller
Data RAM (Built-in CPU)
FFFEFFFH
FFFF000H
FFFFFFFH
SDRAM
32M bytes
I/O (Built-in CPU)
2-22
CPU
Operation of Control Parts
2-2-3. Sensors
(1) Head up switch
The “SA, Head Up Switch” is used to detect the head position (up or down).
When the “Unit, Head” is closed (in the down position), the ”Support Pop Up” of the “Unit,
Head” pushes the “Pop Up Cover Frame” and the “SA, Head Up Switch” pushes the lever of
the “SA, Head Up Switch” and the switch turns ON. Then, pin 117 (HDUSW) of U1A (CPU)
goes "Low" level.
When the “Unit, Head” is opened (in the up position), the ”Support Pop Up” is disengaged from
the “Pop Up Cover Frame”, the lever of the “SA, Head Up Switch” is set free, and the switch
turns OFF. Then, pin 117 (HDUSW) of U1A (CPU) goes "High" level.
+3.3V
U1A
CPU
PDH3
117
HDUSW
R78
R80
Head Up Switch
1
2
C99
Head Up: High
Head Down: Low
SA, Head Up Switch
J11
(Blue)
[SA, Main PCB]
Unit, Head
["Unit, Head" Down Position]
Support Pop Up
Pop Up Cover Frame
Support Pop Up
ON
SA, Head Up Switch
Spring Pop Up
["Unit, Head" Up Position]
Pop Up Cover Frame
SA, Head Up Switch
Spring Pop Up
OFF
2-23
CL-S6621
Operation of Control Parts
(2) Transparent sensor and reflective sensor
The transparent sensor (“SA TRA Sen PCB”) is used to detect the label stuck on liner and the
U-shaped notch on tag. On the other hand, the reflective sensor (“SA Ref Sen PCB”) is used to
detect the black mark printed on the bottom surface of tag. Both sensors are also used to
detect the media end.
The upper side transparent sensor is the phototransistor, and the lower side reflective sensor
consists of 2 LEDs and 1 phototransistor. Media passes between these sensors.
+3.3V
J9
(White)
R65
1
U1A
CPU
ANI0
TRAMON
5
Transparent sensor
output sensing terminal
C96
U14
FPGA
B4_34
B4_33
U20B
7
+
R66
5
REFMON
6
C97
[SA TRA Sen PCB]
2
- 6
3
R70
BA2904
R72
Reflective sensor output
sensing terminal
ANI1
Transparent Sensor
U20A
1
+
J8
(White)
R73
3
Media
1
- 2
R76
+5V
BA2904
2
3
Q9
DTC114EM
R74
4
R14 TSNSCTL1
5
4
R75
[SA Ref Sen PCB]
R13 TSNSCTL0
Reflective Sensor
Q10
DTC114EM
R68
Q7
DTC114EM
From
U1A CPU
U7
D/A Converter
SDATA 12
AO1
DI
PSNSLED
SCLK
AO2
11
CK
2
DACCS 10 CSB AO3
AO4
R69
Q8
DTC114EM
R67
Q6
2SC5658
R71
BH2227
[SA, Main PCB]
Transparent sensor (used for detecting the label or U-shaped notch):
When the liner without label stuck on it passes between both sensors, the light emitted from
the LEDs reaches the transparent sensor, passing through the liner. Thus, the transparent
sensor (phototransistor) conducts and the voltage corresponding to the amount of light is
applied to pin 5 (TRAMON) of U1A (CPU).
Meanwhile, when the liner with the label stuck on it passes between both sensors, the light is
blocked by the label and the transparent sensor (phototransistor) turns OFF. Thus, pin 5
(TRAMON) of U1A (CPU) goes "Low" level. From the difference in these levels at pin 5
(TRAMON) of U1A (CPU), U1A (CPU) can detect the leading edge (arrival) of the label on the
liner.
When media runs out, the light directly falls on the transparent sensor and media end is
detected. In this case, pin 5 of U1A (CPU) will go "High" level.
CL-S6621
2-24
Operation of Control Parts
When the transparent sensor is conducted, the voltage at pin 5 (TRAMON) varies depending
on the characteristics of the light receiving element (phototransistor) of the transparent sensor
and other factors. To solve this problem, U14 (FPGA) outputs TSNSCTL0 (pin R13) and
TSNSCTL1 (pin R14) signals to turn ON/OFF Q8 and Q7 to connect/disconnect R69 and R68
(voltage dividing resistors) to minimize the difference in level at pin5 (TRAMON).
The current flowing into the LEDs is determined by the data sent from the CPU to the
digital-to-analog converter (U7). The digital-to-analog converter converts the data received
from the CPU, and then outputs a resoultant level at pin 2. The base current of the transistor
Q6 is determined by this level. This means that the current flowing into the LEDs is also
determined by this level. In the actual control, the CPU changes data (for controlling the LED
current) to keep the level at pin 5 (TRAMON) of CPU constant.
Reflective sensor (used for detecting the black mark on tag):
When tag with black marks is used, light is reflected by the tag. In the place where no black
mark is there, the phototransistor of the reflective sensor conducts and the voltage
corresponding to the amount of light is applied to pin 6 (REFMON) of U1A (CPU).
When the light falls on the black mark, no light is reflected. In this case, the lower
phototransistor turns OFF and pin 6 (REFMON) of U1A (CPU) will go “Low” level.
When media runs out, the light is not reflected and no light falls on the reflective sensor. In this
case, pin 6 (REFMON) of CPU will go “Low” level and media end is detected.
When the reflective sensor is conducted, the voltage at pin 6 (REFMON) varies depending on
the characteristics of the light receiving element (phototransistor) of the reflective sensor and
other factors. To solve this problem, U14 (FPGA) outputs TSNSCTL0 (pin R13) and
TSNSCTL1 (pin R14) signals to turn ON/OFF Q10 and Q9 to connect/disconnect R75 and R74
(voltage dividing resistors) to minimize the difference in level at pin6 (REFMON).
As to the current control of the LEDs, the operation is the same as for the transparent sensor
mentioned above.
2-25
CL-S6621
Operation of Control Parts
(3) Ribbon Sensor F/R
The ribbon sensor F (“SA, Ribbon Sensor” mounted on the front side) is used to detect the
ribbon tension on the front side as well as ribbon running. While, the ribbon sensor R (“SA,
Ribbon Sensor” mounted on the rear side) is used to detect the ribbon tension on the rear side
as well as the ribbon end. These sensors are photointerrupters.
Front (Take-up side)
U1A
CPU
PCM3
32 RIBSENS_B1 6
31
29
RIBSENS_B2 U2D
11
8
12
2
U21D
9
J19
1
1
+3.3V
13 13 SENS_A1
RA20
U21C
5
6
14 14
9
8
11
U21F
10
12
13
PT501
J104
+3.3V 1
1
2
2
SENS_A2
3
3
15 15 SENS_B1
4
4
PS502
PS501
Ribbon Sensor1 Ribbon Sensor2
16 16 SENS_B2
U21E
18-20
C175
PCM5
34 RIBSENS_A2 U2B
3
5
U2C
J102
R501
18-20
R502
(SA, Ribbon Sensor)
C177
C178
PCM2
U2A
RIBSENS_A1
C176
PCM0
R138
R139
R136
R137
+3.3V
J105
+3.3V
Rear (Supply side)
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
PT501
(Same as above circuit)
(SA, Ribbon Sensor)
[SA, Main PCB]
[SA, Ribbon PCB]
Ribbon sensor F:
The ribbon sensor F is used to keep the ribbon tension on the front side constant. When
printing starts, ribbon is fed and then the front side ribbon slacks. Then, the claws of the “SA,
Ribbon Tension Shaft F” come off the photointerrupters on the “SA, Ribbon Sensor” and the
photointerrupters turn ON. Thus, pin 34/32 (RIBSENS_A1/A2) of U1A (CPU) goes "High" level.
In this case, U1A (CPU) increases the revolution speed of “SA Ribbon Motor F” to take up the
slack of ribbon. As a result, ribbon tightens and the claws are inserted into respective
photointerrupters. Thus, pin 34/32 (RIBSENS_A1/A2) of U1A (CPU) goes "Low" level. Then,
U1A (CPU) slows down the revolution speed of “SA Ribbon Motor F”. During printing, this cycle
is repeated and constant ribbon tension is maintained.
If ribbon is not correctly fed during printing, the ON/OFF state of the photointerrupters on the
“SA, Ribbon Sensor” becomes improper. Thus, the CPU can detect an abnormal ribbon feed.
Ribbon sensor R:
The ribbon sensor R is used to keep the ribbon tension on the rear side constant. When
printing starts, ribbon is fed and the rear side ribbon tightens. Then, the claws of the “SA,
Ribbon Tension Shaft R” are inserted into respective photointerrupters on the “SA, Ribbon
Sensor” and the photointerrupters turn OFF. Thus, pin 31/29 (RIBSENS_B1/B2) of U1A (CPU)
goes "Low" level. In this case, U1A (CPU) increases the revolution speed of “SA Ribbon Motor
R” to supply ribbon faster. As a result, ribbon slacks and the claw comes off the
photointerrupter. Thus, pin 31/29 (RIBSENS_B1/B2) of U1A (CPU) goes "High" level. Then,
U1A (CPU) slows down the revolution speed of the “SA Ribbon Motor R”. During printing, this
cycle is repeated and constant ribbon tension is maintained.
When ribbon runs out, the ON/OFF state of the photointerrupters on the “SA, Ribbon Sensor”
becomes unchangeable. Thus, the CPU can detect the ribbon end.
CL-S6621
2-26
Operation of Control Parts
(4) Head temperature sensor
The head temperature sensor is used to detect the temperature of the “SA, Head”. This sensor
is a thermistor incorporated in the “SA, Head”. Since the resistance of the thermistor changes
according to a temperature change, the voltage at pin 7 (HDTMP) of U1A (CPU) changes
accordingly. The CPU senses the voltage at pin 7 (HDTMP) to detect the head temperature.
According to the temperature of the “SA, Head”, the CPU controls the printing pulse width
applied to the thermal elements to keep the printing density constant.
+3.3V
U1A
CPU
ANI2
J5
R53
R54
7 HDTMP
SA, Head
HDTMP
8
Head Temp.
Thermistor
5
C82
TEMP ERROR Detection
+3.3V
U14
FPGA
B2_28
B2_27
nTEMP_ENABLE
C11
+3.3V
U16B
R40
R41
HDTMP 5
+
6
-
R42
C41
7
R39
BA2903SFV
nTEMP_ERROR
C6
Error: Low
[SA, Main PCB]
Printing operation when the head temperature rises:
If the head temperature reaches 70°C (158°F), printing stops after printing the current label. In
this case, the PRINT LED and CONDITION LED simultaneously blink on the operation panel.
When the temperature of the “SA, Head” falls below 60°C (140°F), the LEDs stop blinking and
printing will be resumed.
Printing
Printing
Printing
60°C
(140°F)
(Stop)
(Stops)
70°C
(158°F)
For further safety, an abnormally high temperature detection circuit is provided. In case this
circuit is activated, the System error is displayed, and the printer stops.
The comparator U16B detects if the level at pin 5 (HDTMP) (i.e., the temperature of the “SA,
Head”) exceeds a certain reference level determined by the output from pin C11
(nTEMP_ENABLE) of U14 (FPGA) (i.e., the predetermined allowable limit temperature). If it
does, nTEMP_ERROR at pin C6 goes “Low” level and this signal is fed to U14 (FPGA). Then,
the System error is displayed and the printer stops. At this time, nTEMP_ENABLE at pin C11 is
set to “Low” level so that nTEMP_ERROR is securely maintained at “Low” level. (To clear the
System error, you need to turn OFF the printer once and then turn it ON.)
2-27
CL-S6621
Operation of Control Parts
(5) PF motor temperature sensor
The PF motor temperature sensor is used to detect the temperature of the “SA PF Motor”. This
sensor is a thermistor bonded to the “SA PF Motor”. Since the resistance of the thermistor
changes according to a temperature change, the voltage at pin 8 (PFTMP) of U1A (CPU)
changes accordingly. The CPU senses the voltage at pin 8 (PFTMP) to detect the PF motor
temperature.
U1A
CPU
ANI3
SA PF Motor
+3.3V
R63
R64
PFTMP
8
Thermistor
J7
1
M
2
C94
TEMP ERROR Detection
+3.3V
+3.3V
U14
FPGA
B2_28
B2_27
nTEMP_ENABLE
C11
R42
R39
U16A
PFTMP 3 +
2
-
R40
R41
C41
1
BA2903SFV
nTEMP_ERROR
C6
Error: Low
[SA, Main PCB]
Printing operation when motor temperature rises:
When the temperature of the “SA PF Motor” rises above 90°C (194°F), printing speed is
reduced to avoid overheating. If it reaches 95°C (203°F), the “SA PF Motor” stops after printing
the current label. In this case, the PRINT LED and CONDITION LED alternately blink on the
operation panel.
When the temperature of the “SA PF Motor” falls below 85°C (185°F), the LEDs stop blink and
printing will be resumed.
Normal speed
Normal speed
Normal speed
85°C
(185°F)
(Stop)
90°C
(194°F)
Low speed
(Stop)
(Stops)
95°C
(203°F)
For further safety, an abnormally high temperature detection circuit is provided. In case this
circuit is activated, the System error is displayed, and the printer stops.
The comparator U16A detects if the level at pin 8 (PFTMP) (i.e., the temperature of the “SA PF
Motor”) exceeds a certain reference level determined by the output from pin C11
(nTEMP_ENABLE) of U14 (FPGA) (i.e., the predetermined allowable limit temperature). If it
does, nTEMP_ERROR at pin C6 goes “Low” level and this signal is fed to U14 (FPGA). Then,
the System error is displayed and the printer stops. At this time, nTEMP_ENABLE at pin C11 is
set to “Low” level so that nTEMP_ERROR is securely maintained at “Low” level. (To clear the
System error, you need to turn OFF the printer once and then turn it ON.)
CL-S6621
2-28
Operation of Control Parts
(6) Ribbon motor temperature sensor
The ribbon motor temperature sensor is used to detect the temperature of the “SA Ribbon
Motor F” on the front side. This sensor is a thermistor bonded to the “SA Ribbon Motor F”.
Since the resistance of the thermistor changes according to a temperature change, the voltage
at pin 11 (RBTMP) of U1A (CPU) changes accordingly. The CPU senses the voltage at pin 11
to detect the temperature of the “SA Ribbon Motor F”.
+3.3V
U1A
CPU
ANI6
SA Ribbon Motor F
(Take-up Side)
R134
R135
RBTMP
11
J19
17 17
C172
B2_28
B2_27
nTEMP_ENABLE
C11
R40
R41
R42
C41
M
1
R39
U17A
RBTMP 3 +
2
-
2
[SA, Ribbon PCB]
+3.3V
+3.3V
Thermistor
J107
RBMTH
18 18
TEMP ERROR Detection
U14
FPGA
J102
1
BA2903SFV
nTEMP_ERROR
C6
Error: Low
[SA, Main PCB]
Printing operation at ribbon motor temperature rise:
When the temperature of the “SA Ribbon Motor F” reaches 85°C (185°F), the “SA Ribbon
Motor F” stops after printing the current label. In this case, the PRINT LED and CONDITION
LED alternately blink on the operation panel.
When the temperature of the “SA Ribbon Motor F” falls below 80°C (176°F), the LEDs stop
blink and printing resumes.
Normal speed
Normal speed
Normal speed
80°C
(176°F)
(Stop)
(Stops)
85°C
(185°F)
For further safety, an abnormally high temperature detection circuit is provided. In case this
circuit is activated, the System error is displayed, and the printer stops.
The comparator U17A detects if the level at pin 3 (RBTMP) (i.e., the temperature of the “SA
Ribbon Motor F”) exceeds a certain reference level determined by the output from pin C11
(nTEMP_ENABLE) of U14 (FPGA) (i.e., the predetermined allowable limit temperature). If it
does, nTEMP_ERROR at pin C6 goes “Low” level and this signal is fed to U14 (FPGA). Then,
the System error is displayed and the printer stops. At this time, nTEMP_ENABLE at pin C11 is
set to “Low” level so that nTEMP_ERROR is securely maintained at “Low” level. (To clear the
System error, you need to turn OFF the printer once and then turn it ON.)
2-29
CL-S6621
Operation of Control Parts
(7) Paper Near End sensor
The paper near end sensor (“SA PNE Sensor”) is used to detect a paper near end status of roll
paper installed in the printer.
By default, issuing a paper near end alarm is disabled. To enable it, you need to change the
Paper Near End Alarm submenu under the “PageSetup” main menu from Off to On.
Before a paper near end status occurs, the “Lever PNE” is pushed by the roll paper edge and
the “Slider PNE” of the paper shaft is engaged with the “SA PNE Sensor”. Then, pin 77
(PNESNS) of U1A (CPU) goes "High" level, and the non paper near end status is detected by
the CPU.
When the roll paper diameter reaches the paper near end point being mechanically set, the
“Lever PNE” that was pushed by the roll paper edge pops up and the “Slider PNE” of the paper
shaft comes off the “SA PNE Sensor”. Then, pin 77 (PNESNS) of U1A (CPU) goes "Low" level,
and the paper near end status is detected by the CPU. (Q12 turns ON in normal mode (i.e., in
other than power saving mode).)
U1A
CPU
D18
PCT7
+3.3V
L: Power Saving mode
H: Normal mode
114
PNESNS
Q13
DTC115EM
U21A
2
77
Paper Near End Sensor
(SA PNE Sensor)
Q12
DTA114EM
PWRSAVE
J12
(White)
R89
1
C103
R90
R91
PT301
1
1
2
2
3
3
PS301
[SA, Main PCB]
[Normal Status]
[PNE (Paper Near End) Status]
Roll Paper Holder
Lever PNE
Spring PNE
SA PNE Sensor
Roll Paper
Spring PNE
Lever PNE
SA PNE Sensor
Roll Paper
Slider PNE
CL-S6621
Slider PNE
2-30
Operation of Control Parts
2-2-4. Drivers
(1) PF motor driver
This is a driving circuit to drive the “SA PF Motor” (stepping motor).
The following illustration shows a simplified circuit.
The “SA PF Motor” is driven by the unipolar constant current chopper method.
The exciting method for the motor is the 1-2 phase method.
The power to the “SA PF Motor” is controlled by U14 (FPGA). When pin P1 (VMTON) is “High”
level, Q27 and Q25 turn ON and +24V is supplied to the “SA PF Motor”.
The exciting method is determined by PFMD1 and PFMD2 signals sent from U14 (FPGA) to
U19 (Motor Driver).
The rotational direction of the “SA PF Motor” is determined by PFDIR signal and PFCLK signal
is a clock signal for turning the “SA PF Motor”.
The digital-to-analog converter (U7) is used to control the PF motor current. Its output is
controlled by the data sent from U1A (CPU).
U14
FPGA
B1_37
Low: Turns on Q25 to supply
power to "SA Motor PF".
+24V
R112
C121
VMTON
P1
R116
R114
Q27
DTC114EM
J6
VMT
Q25
NP15P06SLG
U19
Motor Driver
11
From
U14
FPGA
2
VBB
7
PFMD1
M1
PFMD2
8
M2
PFENB
9
M3
PFDIR
16
CW/CCW
10
PFCLK
CLOCK
PFFLAG 18 FLAG
5
OUTA1
OUTA2
OUTA1
OUTA2
OUTB1
OUTB2
OUTB1
OUTB2
To/From
U1A CPU
U7
D/A Converter
PFMOTCU
13
SDATA 12
REF/SLEEP1
AO1
From
DI
1
R59
R58
C93
R60
SCLK 11
AO2
U1A CPU
CK
DACCS 10 CSB AO3
SLA7073MPRT
AO4
U14
Q5
FPGA
DTC114EM
BH2227
PFOFF
B1_39
P3
This circuit is not used.
2-31
SA PF Motor
1
2
3
4
22
23
20
21
1
3
PF Motor
M
4
6
[SA, Main PCB]
CL-S6621
Operation of Control Parts
(2) Ribbon motor driver
This is a driving circuit to drive the “SA Ribbon Motor F” and “SA Ribbon Motor R” (stepping
motors). The “SA Ribbon Motor F” is used to take up ribbon, while the “SA Ribbon Motor R” is
used to supply ribbon.
Since the motor drive circuit is the same as for both motors, the following describes only for the
“SA Ribbon Motor F” that takes up ribbon.
The “SA Ribbon Motor F” is driven by U101 (Motor Driver) via the RIBSTEP_A signal sent from
U1A (CPU). The rotational direction of the motor is determined by the RIBDIR_A signal sent
from U14 (FPGA). The strength of PF motor excitation (strong and weak) or PF motor current
is controlled by the RBMOTCU signal sent from the U7 (D/A Converter) via U1A (CPU).
Ribbon motor forcible stop function by circuitry:
The CPU monitors the temperature of the “SA Ribbon Motor F” and stops it if its temperature
reaches a certain level, as mentioned in “(6) Ribbon motor temperature sensor”.
In addition to this function, for further safety measures, a circuitry is provided to forcibly stop
the ribbon motors. When the signal nTEMP_ERROR becomes “Low” level, pin2 (ENABLE) of
U101 and U102 becomes “High” level, resulting in stopping the “SA Ribbon Motor F” as well as
“SA Ribbon Motor R”.
The signal nTEMP_ERROR is an ORed error of the following signals.
- Abnormal ribbon motor temperature
- Abnormal PF motor temperature
- Abnormal head temperature
- Abnormal cutter temperature (Optional)
VMT
(24V) J19
U1A
CPU
D24
122
R144
3,4
B3_37
B3_38
RIBSTEP_B
6
N13
RIBDIR_A
7
7
RIBDIR_A
N14
RIBDIR_B
8
8
RIBDIR_B
2
9
9 RBMOTCU_A
15
BH2227
U15B
Monostable
Multivibrator
From
U14 FPGA RIBTRG
9
A
10
B
From
U1A CPU
11
(From Ribbon Motor
Temperature Sensor)
VMT
RIBSTEP_A
5 5
From
U7
U1A CPU
D/A Converter
SDATA 12
AO1
DI
SCLK
AO2
11
CK
RBMOTCU_A
DACCS 10 CSB AO3
5 RBMOTCU_B
AO4
6
nGRESET
3,4
5 1
Q
2
U29
6
RIBSTEP_B
10 10 RBMOTCU_B
11 11 MOT_EN
J101
OUT1A
OUT1B
OUT2A
OUT2B
21
3
18
4
22
2
1
1
A4984SES-T
(Same as above
circuit)
CLR
J103
[SA, Ribbon PCB]
[SA, Main PCB]
2-32
SA Ribbon Motor R
(Supply Side)
4
2
1
74VHC123
nTEMP_ERROR
M
REF
3
4
SA Ribbon Motor F
(Take-up Side)
ENABLE
U102
Motor Driver
Normally "High".
Error: Low
CL-S6621
U101
Motor Driver
19
VBB1
24
VBB2
14
STEP
17
DIR
RIBSTEP_A
D28 126
U14
FPGA
J102
(24V)
VMT
M
Operation of Control Parts
(3) Head driver
The head driver is incorporated in the “SA, Head”.
During printing, pin P16 (VHDON) of U14 (FPGA) goes "High" level, Q28 and Q26 turn ON,
and +24V (VHD) is supplied to the “SA, Head”.
The print data is sent fromU14 (FPGA) to the head driver in the “SA, Head” to select the
thermal elements to be heated. The data is sent from HD1-HD4, nHDSTB, HDCLK and
nHDLAT signal lines (pins K15, K16, M16, M14, N16, N15 and P14 of U14).
According to the print data received, the “SA, Head” heats the thermal elements to print dots
on paper. The width of heating pulse will be changed according to the head temperature to
keep the printing density constant.
U14
FPGA
B3_43
Head supply voltage ON/OFF
VHDON
P15
+3.3V
R115
P16
R117
B3_42
R113
nHCVON
Q28
DTC114EM
Head power supply monitor: Not used.
+24V
VHD
C122
D3
R48
R47
Q26
2SJ505S
R46
D2
VHD
D1
10
HDRES
C74
When checking:
+3.3V
When printing:
+24V
J3
1-5
VHD
6-10
+3.3V +3.3V
13
HD2
HD2
14
HD3
HD3
12
HD4
HD4
nHDSTB
HDCLK
nHDSTB
HDCLK
R52
L1
nHDLAT
nHDLAT
GND
J5
17,21,22
HD1
K16
B3-27
M16
B3_35
M14
B3_33
N16
B3_40
N15
B3_39
P14
B3_41
B3-26
R55
ANI5
Thermal element
abnormality check
Thermal element abnormality
check ON
HD1
ANI4
+3.3V
Q1
DTA114EM
R45
K15
9
VHDMON
C75
R49
+3.3V
U1A
CPU
10
2,15
VDD
SA, Head
(Thermal
Head)
16
18
5,19,20
GND
[SA, Main PCB]
2-33
CL-S6621
Operation of Control Parts
Thermal resistance check:
When the printer is turned ON, the thermal resistance check is conducted. If any fault is found,
it is memorized and, when the printer is turned ON next time, the CONDITION LED and
ERROR LED alternately blink on the operation panel.
During the thermal resistance check, pin P15 (nHCVON) of U14 (FPGA) goes "Low" level, Q1
turns ON, and +3.3V is supplied to the “SA, Head”, instead of +24V.
The following is a simplified circuitry under checking, where Q1 turns ON and +3.3V is applied
to the “SA, Head”. The thermal resistance check (dot check) is done by selecting each thermal
element (dot) one by one. In the following example, a thermal element with resistance R1 is
selected (rest of the thermal elements are disconnected).
At the point "A", the voltage divided by R45 and R1 is developed. The CPU monitors this
voltage at pin 10 (HDRES) and checks if the voltage is out of the allowable range. If it is, the
CPU judges that the thermal element is defective. (For example, if R1 is open, the voltage at
point “A” will be about +3.3V. If R1 is open, corresponding dot will be missing.)
+3.3V
Q1
+3.3V
A
R45
R46
ON
U1A
CPU
HDRES
ANI5
10
OFF
SA, Head
(Thermal Head)
R1
R2
R1, R2, ... ,Rn: Resistance of thermal elements
To see the total number of defective thermal elements:
You can print the total number of defective thermal elements in Service mode.
For details, refer to “(3) Factory/Service mode” and “(3-3) Factory/Service Mode menu table (b) Service Mode menu table”.
The number will be printed as follows.
Bad head element: n dot(s)
Where, n is a number. If no defective thermal element is found, n is 0.
CL-S6621
2-34
Operation of Control Parts
(4) Buzzer driver
This circuit drives the buzzer.
To sound the buzzer, the CPU outputs a pulse waveform from pin 171 (BUZZER). The
transistor Q24 turns ON and OFF, and the buzzer sounds.
+24V
BZ1
U1A
CPU
P77
171
R111
Q24
DTC114EM
BUZZER
[SA, Main PCB]
(5) Fan driver
This circuit drives the cooling fan (“SA, Fan”) for ribbon motors.
When pin 130 (FANCTL_R) is set to “Low” level, Q101 turns ON and the fan is driven.
The fan is driven according to the temperature raise of the “SA Ribbon Motor F”.
When the temperature detected by the thermistor bonded to the “SA Ribbon Motor F” is under
45°C (113°F), the fan is not driven.
When the temperature exceeds 45°C (113°F) during ribbon motor running, the fan starts to
turn.
If the temperature is 60°C (140°F) or more after the ribbon motor is stopped, the fan is kept
turned until the temperature falls below 60°C (140°F).
Fan does not turn.
Fan turns.
(While ribbon motor is
running.)
45°C
(113°F)
60°C
(140°F)
Fan turns.
- While ribbon motor is
running.
- Even if motor is not
running.
+5V
+5V J19
2
U1A
CPU
D30
2
12 12
FANCTL_R
130
J106
J102
18-20
[SA, Main PCB]
D101
+5V
FANCTL R107
1
2
SA, Fan
Q101
2SK3664
18-20
[SA, Ribbon PCB]
2-35
CL-S6621
Operation of Control Parts
2-2-5. Other circuits
(1) Power supply circuit
The “SA, Main PCB” receives +24V from the “Unit, Power Supply” and produces each DC
power.
U22, U24 and U23 are DC-DC converter ICs to produce +5V, +3.3V and +1.5V/+1.2V from
+24V, respectively.
The DC power produced and their purposes are as follows:
+24V: For driving circuits
+5V:
For transparent/reflective circuit, “SA, Ribbon PCB”, optional I/F, etc.
+3.3V: For logic circuits, LED, etc.
+1.5V: For U1 (CPU)
+1.2V: For U14 (FPGA)
If +1.5V for CPU is not produced, Q22 turns OFF and +3.3V for logic circuits is shut off for
safety.
When pin 114 (PWRSAVE) of U1A (CPU) goes “Low”, Q19 turns OFF and the “Unit, Power
Supply” enters Power Saving mode.
In Power Saving mode, the DC output from the “Unit, Power Supply” is changed over from
+24V to approx. +9V.
(Power saving mode is effective if the “Standby Mode” submenu under the “System Setup”
main menu is set to “On”. However, it is set to “Off” at factory default.)
J15
Q19
DTC115EM
9
L: Power Saving mode
H: Normal mode
8
7
From
Unit, Power
Supply
+5V Regulator
6
5
4
4
3
2
+24V
C105
1
C106
+
U22
DC-DC Converter
2
3
VIN LX
5
FB
[SA, Main PCB]
PAM2307AJEADJR
PWRSAVE
D18
114
+5V
R1243S001C
U24
DC-DC Converter
10
PVIN1 SW1 13
11
PVIN2 SW2 14
15
12
PVIN3 SW3
4
9
VIN
FB
U1A
CPU
+5V
+1.5V/+1.2V Regulator
+3.3V
U23
DC-DC Converter
7
8
VIN1 LX1
4
FB1
1
2
VIN2 LX2
10
FB2
+1.5V
+1.2V
PAM2306AYPCB
Q22
+3.3V Regulator
+3.3V
Q23
CL-S6621
2-36
Operation of Control Parts
(2) Reset circuit
This circuit performs the system reset.
When power is turned ON, +3.3V increases gradually from 0V. When the voltage at pin 2
(+3.3V) of U6 (Voltage detector) reaches approx. at 2.8 V, nRESET33 signal goes from “Low”
to “High” level after a certain delay time (determined by C7 at pin 5 of U3) has passed.
While nRESET33 signal is “Low”, U1A (CPU) and U14 (FPGA) are reset. Also, by nGRESET
signal output from U1A (CPU), U14 (FPGA) and other circuits are reset.
Power ON
+3.3V
+3.3V
2
0V
3
H
nRESET33
VDD
1 nRESET33
OUT
5
CD
VSS
U1A
CPU
L : Reset
U6
Voltage Detector
+3.3V
S-1009C28I-M5T1U
C7
L
Reset
28
RESET
nGRESET
P52
23
R5
U14
FPGA
nRESET33
B3_1
C14
nGRESET
B3_17
G13
[SA, Main PCB]
nGRESET
(3) Clock circuit
Crystal oscillator X1 oscillates a 16 MHz clock. This clock is send to U1A (CPU) and the CPU
generates a 128 MHz internal clock and 64 MHz clock.
The 64MHz clock is fed to U14 (FPGA) and U13 (SDRAM)
X2 (Clock generator) oscillates a 48 MHz clock used for optional I/F control.
U1A
CPU
16MHz
X1
164
System Clock
(16MHz)
R1
C1
C2
4
PCD1 88
1
V
C
SB
G
R2
3
159
U14
FPGA
X2
R11 BUSCLK
X2
Clock Generator
+3.3V
Clock for optional I/F
(48MHz)
165
Bus Clock
(64MHz)
X1
P10
D15
B3_6
BUSCLK
2
Internal Clock
(128MHz)
DSC8002DI1(48MHz)
[SA, Main PCB]
2-37
CL-S6621
Operation of Control Parts
(4) Ope-pane circuit
The ope-pane circuit consists of 4 LEDs and 4 switches.
U14 (FPGA) controls the transistors (Q2 to Q4) to turn ON/OFF the LEDs. Each switch signal
is input to U1A (CPU). (The following shows the simplified circuit diagram.)
U14
FPGA
Q2 DTC114EM
LED_G
B3_31
L16
R140
B1_9
+3.3V
Q3 DTC114EM
LED_O
E1
Q4 DTC114EM
LED_R
B3_30
1
1
2
2
PRTLED
3
3
CNDLED
4
ERRLED
5
L15
R142
+3.3V
+3.3V
D301
PRINT (Green)
4
D303
CONDITION (Orange)
5
D304
4
SW/PAUSE
7
7
SW/STOP
8
8
SW302
SW/MODE
9
9
SW303
10 10
SW304
6
To
U1A CPU
POWER ON (Green)
D302
4
SW/FEED
R141
CN301
J4
ERROR (Red)
6
SW301
FEED
PAUSE
STOP
MODE/REPEAT
11 11
12 12
[SA, Main PCB]
[SA, Opepane PCB]
(5) USB I/F control circuit
The USB I/F control circuit supports the interface with a high-speed USB2.0 device.
It consists of U28 (high-speed USB2.0 controller) and peripheral circuits.
X3 (clock generator) generates a 48MHz clock for U28. Pins 41 (VBUS), 39 (DM0) and 40
(DP0) are for USB interface. U28 is controlled by U1A (CPU).
+3.3V
U28
X3
High Speed USB2.0 Controller
Clock Generator
4
3 R129 23
V
XIN
C
1
2
G
SB
DSC8002DI1
Clock for USB2.0
(48MHz)
(48MHz)
D0-D15
A1-A7
To/From
U1A CPU
nRD
LLDQM/nLLBE
LUDQM/nLUBE
nUSBCS
UB2INTP0
UB2INTP1
UBREQ
UBACK
nGRESET
VBUS
L6
41
C137
62-69
72-79
D0-D15
47-49
52-55
DM0
A1-A7
56
57
58
59
C138
D6
J18
USBVCC 1
DP0
RD_N
WR0_N
WR1_N
CS_N
39
L7
DM
40
2
INT_N
3
SOF_N
4
5 DREQ0_N
DACK0_N
44
[SA, Main PCB]
RST_N
2-38
2
3 USB I/F
USBLGND 4
SG 5
L8
DP
D7
R8A66597FP
CL-S6621
High when USB
connector is connected.
Operation of Control Parts
(6) RS232C I/F circuit
The RS232C I/F circuit consists of U25 and U26 (receiver/transmitter) and receives and
transmits the RS232C I/F signals.
+3.3V
TXD1
DTR1
RXD1
DSR1
19
13
12
15
10
nGRESET 20
U25
Receiver/Transmitter
Vcc
J16
TXD
DTR
RXD
DSR
RTS
CTS
INIT
17
T1OUT
8
T2OUT
16
R1IN
9
R2IN
T1IN
T2IN
R1OUT
R2OUT
2
20
3
6 RS232C I/F
4
5
25
SHDN
ICL3222EIVZ
To/From
U1A
CPU
+3.3V
19
13
12
CTS1 15
RS_INIT 10
RTS1
nGRESET 20
U26
Receiver/Transmitter
Vcc
17
T1OUT
8
T2OUT
16
R1IN
9
R2IN
T1IN
T2IN
R1OUT
R2OUT
SHDN
[SA, Main PCB]
ICL3222EIVZ
(7) Option I/F circuit
The optional I/F circuit consists of an ordinary USB interface circuit and communication I/F
signal lines that are connected to U1A (CPU) and U14 (FPGA).
NAND gates (U27A, U27B and U27C) and transistor Q29 consist of a USB connection
detecting circuit. When USB I/F is connected to the printer, pin 23 (VBUS) of J17 is set to
“High”. The detection circuit detects this level and outputs a UBINTP pulse to the CPU to
inform of the USB connection.
+5V
J17
+24V
28-32
20
DATA0-DATA7
USB connection detecting circuit
To/From
U14
FPGA
+3.3V
Q29
DTA114EM
+3.3V
U1A
CPU
P76
R128
USBON
172
UBINTP 8
D23
121
U27C
9
10
2
1
3
U27A
6
U27B
R125
To/From
U1A CPU
nSLCT-IN/CTS, nATFD-XT/DSR
nSTROBE/OCIO, nINIT/nPRIME
BUSY/RTS, nACKNLG/DTR
nFAULT, SLCT/PPON0
PE, DSWOUT, TXD0/SO0/OBDIR
IFRESET
RXD0/SI0, SCK0
High when USB
R126 connector is connected.
5
4
C133
4-11
I/F PCB
(Option)
25,26
VBUS
23
R127
USB_D+
USB_D-
UDP
UDP 160
UDM
UDM
161
1-3
12-18
24,27
21
22
33-38,40
[SA, Main PCB]
2-39
CL-S6621
Operation of Control Parts
(8) Peeler circuit (for optional peeler)
The peeler circuit supplies +5V to an optional peeler by turning Q15 and Q14 ON.
When a peeler is installed in the printer, pin 80 (CPRTYP1) is set to “Low” level. With this
“Low” level signal, the printer recognizes the connected peeler. (The CPU judges the
connected optional device (either peeler or cutter) by detecting signals CPRTYP0 (at pin 81)
and CPRTYP1 (at pin 80). The signal CPRTYP0 for an optional cutter is now at “High” level
(not connected). )
A peel sensor detects the printed label that is peeled off by the peeler. Upon detection of the
label peeled, printing stops and the printer waits for removal of the label. When you remove the
label, the peeler sensor detects it and the printer resumes printing.
The peel sensor signal is input to pin 12 (ANI7) of U1A (CPU). From the input level of this
signal, the CPU detects the peeler condition. (Since pin 80 (CPRTYP1) is “Low” level, Q16
turns OFF and U3 (analog switch) is ON.)
L: Power Saving mode
H: Normal mode
U1A
CPU
D18
PCT2
R87
+5V
Q14
2SJ625
PWRSAVE
114
Q15
DTC115EM
J13
+3.3V
CPRTYP0
81
L: When Peeler installed.
R86
CPRTYP1
PCT3
80
+3.3V R88
C102
ANI7
PEELSENS
(CUTTMP)
12
Switch: ON (Fixed)
CL-S6621
2
R83
Q16
DTC114EM
+3.3V
D4 R92
4
1 PEELSENS
U3
(Analog Switch)
R93
[SA, Main PCB]
2-40
1
2
3
4
5
Peeler Control Circuit
NC
GND
CPRTYP1
+5V
PEELSENS
Operation of Control Parts
(9) Cutter control circuit (for optional cutter)
The cutter control circuit supplies VMT (+24V) to an optional cutter.
When a cutter is installed in the printer, pin 81 (CPRTYP0) is set to “Low” level. With this “Low”
level signal, the printer recognizes the connected cutter. (The CPU judges the connected
optional device (either peeler or cutter) by detecting signals CPRTYP0 (at pin 81) and
CPRTYP1 (at pin 80). The signal CPRTYP1 for an optional peer is now at “High” level (not
connected). ) The cutter action is controlled by the signals CUTCON0 and CUTCON1 (at pins
N1 and N2) output from U14 (FPGA). The cutter home position signal is input to pin 118
(CUTHP) of U1A (CPU).
A thermistor is attached to the cutter motor for detecting the motor temperature. The signal
from the thermistor is input to pin 12 (CUTTMP) of U1A (CPU). The CPU detects the
temperature by monitoring the signal CUTTMP and, if the temperature reaches 78°C (108.4°F),
the cutter motor stops its operation. At this time, an error is issued and the PRINT LED and
CONDITION LED blink alternatively. Wait until the cutter motor gets cool. When the
temperature of the cutter motor falls below 70°C (185°F), the cutter operation will automatically
resume.
(+24V)
VMT
J10
U14
FPGA
B1_33
B1_34
+3.3V
RA18
CUTCON0
N1
PCT2
PCT3
N2
5
6
7
CUTHP
118
CPRTYP0
81
CPRTYP1
+3.3V
L: When Cutter installed.
+3.3V
80
CUTTMP
(PEELSENS)
12
nTEMP_ENABLE
C11
R85
Q11
DTC114EM
2
8
9
R82
10
C101
R84
4
1 CUTTMP
R40
R41
R42
R81
Cutter Control Circuit
+24V
+24V
CUTCTL0
CUTCTL1
CUTHP
CUTTH
CPRTYP0
GND
GND
GND
+3.3V
R79
C100
TEMP ERROR Detection
+3.3V
+3.3V
B2_27
3
4
U5
(Analog
Switch)
Switch: ON (Fixed)
B2_28
R77
C98
D20
U14
FPGA
2
CUTCON1
U1A
CPU
ANI7
1
U17B
R39
CUTTMP
+
7
5
6
BA2903SFV
C41
nTEMP_ERROR
C6
Error: Low
[SA, Main PCB]
For further safety, an abnormally high temperature detection circuit is provided. In case this
circuit is activated, the System error is displayed, and the printer stops.
2-41
CL-S6621
Operation of Control Parts
The comparator U17B detects if the level at pin 5 (CUTTMP) exceeds a certain reference level
determined by the output from pin C11 (nTEMP_ENABLE) of U14 (FPGA) (i.e., the
predetermined allowable limit temperature). If it does, the signal nTEMP_ERROR at pin C6 of
U14 (FPGA) goes “Low” level. Then, the System error is displayed and the printer stops. At this
time, nTEMP_ENABLE at pin C11 is set to “Low” level so that nTEMP_ERROR is securely
maintained at “Low” level. (To clear the System error, you need to turn OFF the printer once
and then turn it ON.)
CL-S6621
2-42
Operation Panel
2-3.
Operation Panel
Operation panel is located on the left/front side of the printer.
Operation panel consists of 4 keys and 4 LEDs, which perform to set the condition of the printer
and indicate the operating condition.
POWER
PRINT
CONDITION
ERROR
PAUSE
FEED
STOP
MODE/REPEAT
2-3-1. External view
(1) Keys
There are 4 keys, [MODE/REPEAT], [PAUSE], [FEED] and [STOP]. The function name on the
key is selected when the key is pressed.
(2) LEDs
There are 4 LEDs, POWER, PRINT, CONDITION and ERROR. The LEDs light up or blink to
indicate printer status, setting modes, or error conditions.
POWER LED lights up when power is turned on. (green)
PRINT LED lights up when the printer is ready to print (on-line state). (green) It is also used in
Menu Setting mode and Sensor Adjustment mode.
CONDITION LED lights up in Menu Setting mode or Sensor Adjustment mode. (orange)
ERROR LED lights or blinks when error occurs. (red)
(To indicate an error, PRINT and CONDITION LEDs will be also used.)
2-43
CL-S6621
Operation Panel
2-3-2. Operation using the keys
The following explains the normal operation and test operation accessible by pressing and holding
the keys while turning ON the power.
In this manual, pressing and holding the key while turning the power ON is described as follows:
[Key name]
+
[Key name]
+
[POWER]
Example: [MODE] + [POWER] (to enter menu setting mode)
(1) Normal operation
The following two operations are available.
Operation
[PAUSE] + [FEED] + [STOP]
+ [POWER]
Description
Enters sensor adjustment
mode.
[MODE] + [POWER]
Enters menu setting mode.
Remarks
See “(1-1) Sensor
adjustment mode”. For
details, see the User's
Manual.
See “(1-2) Menu setting
mode”. For details, see the
User's Manual.
(1-1) Sensor adjustment mode
According to media to be used, you need to perform the sensor adjustment.
The following shows the rough description how to adjust the sensor. For details, refer to
the User’s manual.
Before performing the sensor adjustment, select the Media Sensor menu (“See Through”,
“Reflect”, or “None”) according to media to be used. See “(1-2) Menu setting mode” on the
next page.
Media Sensor menu
Media
See Through
Label paper or tag with U-shaped notches
Reflect
Tag with black marks
None
Continuous media
All operations are made with the key.
1. Entering the sensor adjustment mode ([PAUSE] + [FEED] + [STOP] + [POWER])
2. Selecting the sensor to be used (either the transparent sensor or reflective sensor)
Transparent sensor:
Label paper, Tag with U-shaped notches
Reflective sensor:
Tag with black marks
3. Positioning of the sensor(s) against media
4. Sensitivity adjustment using actual media to be used
CL-S6621
2-44
Operation Panel
(1-2) Menu setting mode
Set the menu according to your requirements. The following shows the menu settings print
sample. To enter this mode, while pressing and holding the [MODE] key, turn ON the
power. ([MODE] + [POWER]) For details, refer to the User’s Manual.
Machine Information
Model Number
Boot Version
ROM Version
ROM Date(DD//MM//YY)
ROM Check Sum
FPGA Version
Head Check
Print Counter
Service Counter
Cut Counter
Sensor Monitor
Option Interface
: CL-S6621
: X.X
: EBXXXXXX
: XX/XX/XX
: XXXX
: XXXXXXX
: OK
: 0000.068km
: 0000.068km
:0
: 2.53V
: None
Note:
Citizen continually enhances its
printers with new options and
settings based on our customer’s
requests. Extra or changed menu
items may appear on the print out
in some cases.
Current Menu Settings
[Global Config Menu]
Config Set
:1
[PageSetup Menu]
Print Speed
Print Darkness
Darkness Adjust
Print Method
Ribbon Winding
Continuous Media Length
Vertical Position
Horizontal Shift
Vertical Image Shift
Auto Side Shift
Media Sensor
Small Media Adjustment
Small Media Length
Symbol Set
: 6 IPS
: 10
: 00
: Thermal Transfer
: Outside
: 4.00 inch
: 0.00 inch
: 0.00 inch
: 0.00 inch
: 0 dot
: See Through
: Off
: 1.00 inch
: PM
[System Setup Menu]
Sensor Level
Paper End Level
Error Reporting
Buzzer Select
Metric/Inch
Max Media Length
Settings Lock
Keyboard Lock
Standby Mode
Standby Timer
Paper Near End Status
Paper Near End Alarm
Control Code
Emulation Select
Emulation Auto Detect
: 1.7 V
: 2.80 V
: On Printing
: On
: Inch
: 10.00 inch
: Off
: Off
: Off
: 5 min
: On
: Off
: STD
: DM4
: Full Auto
[After Print Menu]
AutoConfigure
Function Select
Cutter Action
Paper Position
Mode/Repeat Key
: On
: Tear
: Backfeed
: 0.00 inch
: Disabled
2-45
CL-S6621
Operation Panel
[Interface Menu]
RS-232C Baud rate
RS-232C Parity
RS-232C Length
RS-232C Stop bit
RS-232C X-ON
IEEE1284
USB Device Class
USB VCOM Protocol
USB 2.0 High Speed
: 9600 bps
: None
: 8 bit
: 1 bit
: Yes
: On
: Printer
: Auto
: On
(2) Test mode
The following test modes are available.
Operation
Description
[FEED] + [POWER]
Enters self print mode
[STOP] + [POWER]
Enters hex dump mode
Remarks
See “(2-1) Self
print mode”.
See “(2-2) Hex
dump mode”.
(2-1) Self print mode
You can check the printing quality by printing the self print pattern.
For label (prints 2 labels):
1. While pressing and holding the [FEED] key, turn
on the power.
2. When the PRINT LED blinks slowly (later, it will
blink rapidly), release the [FEED] key.
The printer enters self print mode. The label is
fed, self test printing is made for two labels, and
then printing stops.
3. To repeat printing, press the [FEED] key again.
To exit self print mode, turn off the power.
For continuous media:
1. While pressing and holding the [FEED] key, turn
on the power.
2. The PRINT LED will blink slowly. When it
changes to rapid blink, release the [FEED] key.
The printer enters self print mode and self test
printing is made.
3. To repeat printing, press the [FEED] key again.
To exit self print mode, turn off the power.
CL-S6621
2-46
[Print pattern in self print mode]
Media feed direction
Operation Panel
(2-2) Hex dump mode
You can print the data in the receive buffer in the hexadecimal form.
For label:
1. While pressing and holding the [STOP] key, turn on the power.
2. When the PRINT LED blinks slowly (later, it will blink rapidly), release the [STOP] key.
The printer enters hex dump mode and hex dump printing starts.
To exit hex dump mode, turn off the power.
For continuous media:
1. While pressing and holding the [STOP] key, turn on the power.
2. The PRINT LED will blink slowly. When it changes to rapid blink, release the [STOP]
key.
The printer enters hex dump mode and hex dump printing starts.
To exit hex dump mode, turn off the power.
[Dump list example]
DUMP LIST
02 40 30 31 30 30 0D 02 60 30 30 32 30 0D 02 4C .M0100..c0020..L
44 31 31 0D 31 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 31 30
D11.100000000010
30 30 31 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 0010123456789:;<
(3) Factory/Service mode
Operation
All keys + [POWER]
Description
Enters factory mode and service mode
Remarks
(3-1) General
Factory mode and Service mode are available for maintenance.
Factory mode:
You can change the factory-set items such as logical shift of the sensor or head, and
double heat (printing the same dot twice).
In Factory mode, DO NOT change the factory-set values unless you need it,
since there are essential items related to printing accuracy, etc.
Service mode:
You can perform checks such as “head check “and “counter print” to print the total print
length since the printer is firstly used.
2-47
CL-S6621
Operation Panel
(3-2) How to enter the Factory/Service Mode
How to enter Factory/Service mode differs from the “user menu setup mode” operation.
However, once you have entered Factory/Service mode, the basic operation is the same
as that for the “user menu setup mode” explained in the User’s manual.
The Factory/Service mode menu appears at the top of the user menus as follows:
Top menus
All keys + POWER
Factory Mode menu
Added
Do you want to change the menu
settings?
Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP)
Do you want to print the current menu
settings?
Yes=(PAUSE)
No=(STOP)
[PAUSE (Yes)]
To print
[PAUSE (Yes)]
: Different operation from the “user menu setup mode”
Service Mode menu
Global config menu
Page Setup menu
System Setup menu
After Print menu
Interface menu
VuePrint
menu
system
The menu operation principle is the same as for the “user menu setup mode” operation.
The keys to be used and the functions are as follow:
PAUSE
FEED
STOP
Yes / Select / Save
No / Next item / Increase item
Next digit
MODE/REPEAT
Exit the current menu or the
VuePrint menu system
CL-S6621
2-48
Operation Panel
[Menu settings print sample in Factory/Service mode]
Machine Information
Model Number
Boot Version
ROM Version
ROM Date(DD//MM//YY)
ROM Check Sum
FPGA Version
Head Check
Print Counter
Service Counter
Cut Counter
Sensor Monitor
Option Interface
: CL-S6621
: X.X
: EBXXXXXX
: XX/XX/XX
: XXXX
: XXXXXXX
: OK
: 0000.068km
: 0000.068km
:0
: 2.53V
: None
Note:
Citizen continually enhances its
printers with new options and
settings based on our customer’s
requests. Extra or changed menu
items may appear on the print out
in some cases.
Factory Mode Settings
Through Sensor Position
Reflect Sensor Position
Machine Tear Position
Machine Cut Position
Machine Peel Position
Machine Horizontal Pos.
AutoCal Mode
See Through Sensor
Reflect Sensor
SeeThrough Sensitivity
Reflect Sensitivity
Through Cal Level
Reflect Cal Level
SensNone Cal Level
Darkness Rate
Double Heat Menu
PowerOn Head Check
Head Check Start Pos.
Head Check Stop Pos.
Head Error Print
Ribbon Control
Ribbon End Detection
Void to TOF
Reverse Media Length
Min Cut Length
Paper End Sensor
Paper End Length
Parallel Error Output
Auto Online
Auto Online Delay
Top Form Sensing
USB Serial Number
Auto Exec Print
Config Print Layout
Head Clean Message
Print Preference
: 0 dot
: 0 dot
: 0 dot
: 0 dot
: 0 dot
: 0 dots
: On
: 0.0 V
: 0.0 V
: Low
: Low
: 2.30 V
: 2.10 V
: 2.05 V
: High
: Off
: On
: Dot 1
: Dot 1344
: No
: Auto
: Quick
: Off
: 0.00 inch
: Default
: On
: Default
: On
: Off
: 2 sec
: On
: Off
: On
: Standard
: Off
: Darkness
Submenus for maintenance
only
Current Menu Settings
[Global Config Menu]
Config Set
:1
2-49
CL-S6621
Operation Panel
CL-S6621
[PageSetup Menu]
Print Speed
Print Darkness
Darkness Adjust
Print Method
Ribbon Winding
Continuous Media Length
Vertical Position
Horizontal Shift
Vertical Image Shift
Auto Side Shift
Media Sensor
Small Media Adjustment
Small Media Length
Symbol Set
: 6 IPS
: 10
: 00
: Thermal Transfer
: Outside
: 4.00 inch
: 0.00 inch
: 0.00 inch
: 0.00 inch
: 0 dot
: See Through
: Off
: 1.00 inch
: PM
[System Setup Menu]
Sensor Level
Paper End Level
Error Reporting
Buzzer Select
Metric/Inch
Max Media Length
Settings Lock
Keyboard Lock
Standby Mode
Standby Timer
Paper Near End Status
Paper Near End Alarm
Control Code
Emulation Select
Emulation Auto Detect
: 1.7 V
: 2.80 V
: On Printing
: On
: Inch
: 10.00 inch
: Off
: Off
: Off
: 5 min
: On
: Off
: STD
: DM4
: Full Auto
[After Print Menu]
AutoConfigure
Function Select
Cutter Action
Paper Position
Mode/Repeat Key
: On
: Tear
: Backfeed
: 0.00 inch
: Disabled
[Interface Menu]
RS-232C Baud rate
RS-232C Parity
RS-232C Length
RS-232C Stop bit
RS-232C X-ON
IEEE1284
USB Device Class
USB VCOM Protocol
USB 2.0 High Speed
: 9600 bps
: None
: 8 bit
: 1 bit
: Yes
: On
: Printer
: Auto
: On
2-50
Operation Panel
[Procedure to enter Factory/Service Mode]
1. Set media.
2. While pressing and holding all keys, turn on the power. (ALL keys + [POWER])
The printer enters Factory/Service mode. The PRINT LED and CONDITION LED light up
and the following message is printed on media.
Citizen CL-S6621 VuePrint Menu System
The four control panel buttons are used to select different options.
Yes / Select / Save
= PAUSE (P) key
No / Next Item / Increase Item = STOP (S) key
Next Digit
= FEED (F) key
Exit to previous menu
= MODE (M) key
Do you want to reset this printer to factory settings?
Generally:
Yes=(PAUSE)
No=(STOP)
3. Press the [STOP] key to skip to the next message.
Then, the following message is printed.
Do you want to print the current menu settings?
Yes=(PAUSE)
No=(STOP)
Yes=(PAUSE)
No=(STOP)
4. Press the [STOP] key to skip to the next message.
Then, the following message is printed.
Do you want to change the menu settings?
5. Press the [PAUSE] key to enter the menu settings mode.
Then, the following top menu is printed.
Do you want to change “Factory Mode Menu” items?
Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE)
• To enter the Factory Mode menu, proceed to the next step 6.
• To proceed to the next top menu (Service Mode menu), press the [STOP] key. See step
7.
• To return to the previous one, press the [MODE] key.
6. Press the [PAUSE] key to enter the submenus.
* The following submenus under the Factory Mode menu will be printed as you press the
[PAUSE] key repeatedly.
* For setting each item, see “(3-3) Factory/Service Mode menu table - (a) Factory Mode
menu table”, and setting example “How to change the value in the Factory Mode menu”
on page 2-56.
Through Sensor Position
+000dots
Save=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Reflect Sensor Position
+000dots
Save=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Mach Tear Pos
Save=(PAUSE)
Exit=(MODE)
+000dots
Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP)
(to be continued)
2-51
CL-S6621
Operation Panel
Mach Cut Pos
Save=(PAUSE)
+000dots
Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Mach Peel Pos
Save=(PAUSE)
+000dots
Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Mach Hor Pos
Save=(PAUSE)
+00dots
Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
AutoCal Mode
Save=(PAUSE)
ON
Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
SeeThrough Sensor
0.0
Save=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED)
Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Reflect Sensor
Save=(PAUSE)
Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
0.0
Next Digit=(FEED)
SeeThrough Sensitivity
Low
Save=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Reflect Sensitivity
Low
Save=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Darkness Rate
Save=(PAUSE)
High
Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Double Heat Menu
OFF
Save=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
PowerOn Head Check
ON
Save=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Ribbon End Detection
Quick
Save=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Parallel Error Output
ON
Save=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
USB Serial Number
OFF
Save=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Auto Exec Print
ON
Save=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Config Print Layout
Standard
Save=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Print Preference
Darkness
Save=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Note: In the actual printing, the cursor “^” will be printed instead of “
CL-S6621
2-52
(underline)”.
Operation Panel
7. When the Service Mode Menu message is printed as shown below, press the [PAUSE] key
to enter its submenus.
* The following submenus will be printed successively as you press the [PAUSE] key
repeatedly.
* When you press the [PAUSE] key, check is done and the check result will be printed.
For performing each item, see “(3-3) Factory/Service Mode menu table - (b) Service
Mode menu table” and setting example “How to perform the check in the Service Mode
menu” on page 2-58.
Do you want to change “Service Mode Menu” items?
Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE)
Head Check
Yes=(PAUSE)
Exec
No=(STOP)
ROM Check
Yes=(PAUSE)
Exec
No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE)
RAM Check
Yes=(PAUSE)
Exec
No=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Print Counter
Exec
Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Service Counter
Exec
Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Cutter Counter
Exec
Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
Exit=(MODE)
Do you want to change “Page Setup Menu” items?
Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE)
8. To exit the Factory/Service mode, press the [MODE] key.
2-53
CL-S6621
Operation Panel
(3-3) Factory/Service Mode menu table
The following table shows the value and description of each submenu under Factory Mode
menu and Service Mode menu.
(a) Factory Mode menu table
*: “+” shows that the object logically moves forward/rightward. “-“ shows that the object
logically moves backward/leftward.
**: 8 dots correspond to 1 mm for each adjustment value. (Namely, 203 dots correspond
to 1”.)
Submenu Name
Through Sensor
Position
(See Note.)
Reflect Sensor
Position
(See Note.)
Mach Tear Pos
Mach Cut Pos
Mach Peel Pos
Mach Hor Pos
AutoCal Mode
SeeThrough
Sensor
Reflect Sensor
Adjustable Value
(Default Value)
-256 to +256 [dots]
(+000 [dots])
Logically shifts the transparent sensor position
back and forth. (-32 to +32 mm, -1.26 to +1.26”)
-256 to +256 [dots]
(+000 [dots])
Logically shifts the reflective sensor position back
and forth. (-32 to +32 mm, -1.26 to +1.26”)
-256 to +256 [dots]
(+000 [dots])
-256 to +256 [dots]
(+000 [dots])
-256 to +256 [dots]
(+000 [dots])
-16 to +32 [dots]
(+00 [dots])
ON, OFF
(ON)
0.0 to 3.3 [V]
(0.0 [V])
Logically shifts the tear off position back and forth.
(-32 to +32 mm, -1.26 to +1.26”)
Logically shifts the cutting position back and forth.
(-32 to +32 mm, -1.26 to +1.26”) (Optional)
Logically shifts the peel position back and forth.
(-32 to +32 mm, -1.26 to +1.26”) (Optional)
Logically shifts the head position right and left.
(-2 to +4 mm, -0.08 to +0.16”)
Automatically controls the light amount in each
Media sensor menu (See Through, Reflect, None).
This menu is effective when “AutoCal Mode” is set
to OFF. The light amount in Media sensor menu
“See Through” can be changed manually.
Larger value emits larger amount of light.
This menu is effective when “AutoCal Mode” is set
to OFF. The light amount in Media Sensor menu
“Reflect” can be changed manually.
Larger value emits larger amount of light.
This menu is effective when “AutoCal Mode” is set
to OFF. The sensitivity of the transparent sensor
can be changed in 3 levels.
This menu is effective when “AutoCal Mode” is set
to OFF. The sensitivity of the reflective sensor can
be changed in 3 levels.
The rate for darkness increase/decrease can be
set.
To display the item “Double Heat Menu” in the
“PageSetup Menu” or not is selectable.
0.0 to 3.3 [V]
(0.0 [V])
SeeThrough
Sensitivity
Low, Medium, High
(Low)
Reflect Sensitivity
Low, Medium, High
(Low)
Darkness Rate
Double Heat
Menu
CL-S6621
High, Low
(High)
ON, OFF
(OFF)
Description
2-54
Operation Panel
Submenu Name
PowerOn Head
Check
Ribbon End
Detection
Parallel Error Out
USB Serial
Number
Auto Exec Print
Config Print
Layout
Print Preference
Adjustable Value
(Default Value)
ON, OFF
(ON)
Quick, Normal,
Slow (Quick)
ON, OFF
(ON)
ON, OFF
(OFF)
ON, OFF
(ON)
Standard, Reversed
(Standard)
Darkness, Speed
(Darkness)
Description
To perform the head check at power ON or not is
selectable.
Sets the ribbon end detection time.
To set the Fault signal to ON or not at the time of
error occurrence in parallel interface is selectable.
To send the serial number to the host when the
USB interface is connected to the printer or not is
selectable.
To execute the Auto Exec file stored in the printer
at power ON or not is selectable.
Print layout type can be selected.
Standard: Prints setting items on the left and set
values on the right.
Reversed: Prints set values on the left and setting
items on the right.
To put the priority on printing density or printing
speed is selectable.
Note: “Through Sensor Position” adjustment and “Reflect Sensor Position” adjustment must
be done after one of the following parts is replaced.
• SA, Main PCB
• SA, Ribbon Sensor (on both front and rear sides)
2-55
CL-S6621
Operation Panel
How to change the value in the Factory Mode menu
For example, the following shows how to logically move the thermal head position 1 mm
(0.04”) toward the right side. In this case, you should add 8 (dots) to the current value (e.g.
+08).
• Variable range: -16 to +32 dots (default +00 dot) (-2 to +4 mm, -0.08 to +0.16”)
• 8 dots correspond to 1 mm. (203 dots correspond to 1”.)
1 mm
+
Head
[Front]
1. Perform steps 1-6 on page 2-51 to enter the Factory Mode menu. See “(3-2) How to enter
the Factory/Service Mode”.
2. Press the [PAUSE] key until “Mach Hor Pos” submenu is printed.
Do you want to change “Factory Mode Menu” items?
Y es=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE)
Through Sensor Position
+000dos
S ave=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE)
:
:
Mach Hor Pos
+00dots
Save=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE)
Note: In the actual printing, the cursor “^” will be printed instead of “
(underline)”.
3. To set the value to 16 (0 plus 16), press the [FEED] key to move the cursor to the next
digit (+00), and then press the [STOP] key once to specify “1”.
Each time you press the [STOP] key, the value of the current digit with the cursor will scroll
(0, 1, 2, 3, 4, ...., 9, 0).
4. Next, press the [FEED] key to move the cursor to the next digit (+10).
The changed value is printed.
Mach Hor Pos
Save=(PAUSE)
+10dots
Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP)
Exit=(MODE)
5. Press the [STOP] key 6 times to specify “6”.
Each time you press the key, the value will scroll (8, 9, 0, 1, ...., 6).
6. To save the set value, press the [PAUSE] key.
The set value will be printed. Be sure that the new value is “16”, and then press the
[MODE] key to exit the item.
* If the value is not the one you expected, repeat above operation.
Mach Hor Pos
Save=(PAUSE)
CL-S6621
+16dots
Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP)
2-56
Exit=(MODE)
Operation Panel
(b) Service Mode menu table
Submenu Name
Head Check
Value
None
ROM Check
None
RAM Check
None
Print Counter
None
Service Counter
None
Cut Counter
None
Description
[PAUSE]: Checks the number of defective
thermal elements and prints it. If no defective
thermal element is found, “0” will be printed.
Example: Bad head element:
0 dot(s)
[STOP]: Nothing is printed.
[PAUSE]: Performs ROM checksum test, and
prints the check result (OK or NG) and the
checksum value.
Example: PROGRM ROM OK 4F4E
[STOP]: Nothing is printed.
[PAUSE]: Performs RAM capacity check and
prints the check result.
Example: RAM OK 32768K
[STOP]: Nothing is printed.
[PAUSE]: Prints the total printed length
accumulated from when the printer is firstly
used.
Example: Length 1234.5Km
[STOP]: Nothing is printed.
[PAUSE]: Prints the service counter length in
Km accumulated from when it was reset last
time.
Example: Length 0123.4Km
Clear Service Counter ?
Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP)
To clear the service counter, press the
[PAUSE] key again. To quit, press the
[STOP] key.
[STOP]: Nothing is printed.
[PAUSE]: Prints the cut counter value
accumulated from when it was reset last time.
Example: Count 10
Clear Cut Counter ?
Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP)
To clear the cut counter, press the
[PAUSE] key again. To quit, press the
[STOP] key.
[STOP]: Nothing is printed.
2-57
CL-S6621
Operation Panel
How to perform the check in the Service Mode menu
For example, the following shows how to perform the head check.
1
1. Perform steps 1-7 on pages 2-51 to 2-53 to enter the Service Mode menu. See “(3-2) How
to enter the Factory/Service Mode”.
2. Press the [PAUSE] key until “Head Check” submenu is printed.
Do you want to change “Service Mode Menu” items?
Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE)
Head Check
Yes=(PAUSE)
No=(STOP)
Exec
Exit=(MODE)
3. Press the [PAUSE] key to check for head abnormality.
The number of faulty thermal elements is printed.
Example:
Bad head element:
0 dot(s)
After printing the check result, the next submenu is automatically printed.
If you press the [STOP] key, nothing is printed.
CL-S6621
2-58
Interface
2-4.
Interface
2-4-1. Serial Interface
(1) Specifications
System
Signal level
Baud rate
Data length
Stop bit
Parity
Connector
Start/stop asynchronous full duplex communication
RS-232C
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps
7 bits, 8 bits
1 bit, 2 bits
Odd, even, none
D-SUB 25PIN 225AE25FSNBBA3(COXOC)
(2) Signal line and pin assignment
Pin No.
1
2
Signal
Abbr.
FG
TXD
Signal name
Function
Protective ground
Transmit Data
3
RXD
Receive data
4
RTS
Transmission request
5
CTS
Able to transfer data
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
7
8-13
14
15-19
20
SGND
NC
VCC
NC
DTR
21-25
NC
Signal ground
-----+3.3V
-----Data Terminal
Ready
------
2-59
Protective grounding
Signal line that transmits data from the printer
to the host
Signal line that transmits data from the host to
the printer
Signal line that becomes active when the
printer can receive data
Signal line that becomes active when other
devices can receive data from the printer
Signal line that is active when the host can
interface with the printer
Signal grounding line
Not used
(Factory use only )
Not used
Signal line that is active when the printer can
interface with the host
Not used
CL-S6621
Interface
(3) Protocol
XON/XOFF system:
Controlled with the data transmission request signal X-ON (11H) code and the data
transmission stop request signal X-OFF (13H) code.
The conditions for the X-ON code output are as follows:
• When the printer is turned from off-line to on-line.
• When the remaining of receive buffer is 1024 bytes or more after sending X-OFF code.
The conditions for the X-OFF code output are as follows:
• When the remainder of receive buffer is 128 bytes or less.
• When the printer is turned from on-line to off-line.
When the media end is detected.
When a printer error occurs.
0
16K
16K bytes
Received data
1024 bytes
X-ON code sending
128 bytes
X-OFF code sending
READY/BUSY System:
DTR signal is controlled with READY ("High")/BUSY ("Low") level.
DTR turns to "High (Ready)" in the following conditions:
• When the printer is in on-line mode, and
• When the remaining buffer is 128 bytes or more.
(After DTR becomes "High", DTR retains "High" until the remaining buffer becomes 1024
bytes or less.)
DTR turns to "Low (Busy)" in the following conditions:
• When the printer is in off-line mode.
• When the remaining buffer is less than 128 bytes.
(After DTR becomes "Low", DTR retains "Low" until the remaining buffer becomes 1024
bytes or more.)
CL-S6621
2-60
Interface
2-4-2. USB Interface
(1) Specifications
Standards
Transmission speed
Receive buffer
Connector
Complies with Universal Serial Bus Specification 2.0
Compatible with 480Mbps (high speed) transmission
16K bytes
15120-00410 (KST)
(2) Signal line and pin arrangement
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Signal code
VBUS
D+
DGND
Signal
USB power
Signal line +
Signal line GND
Function
USB power (+5V)
+ signal line
- signal line
GND
2-4-3. Parallel Interface (Option)
(1) Specifications
Transmission system
Receive buffer size
Transmission modes
Signal level
8-bit parallel data
16K bytes
Compatible mode
It is an asynchronous forward channel mode to send the byte width
data from the host to the printer. The interface line of the data is
operated in accordance with signal line definitions of Centronics.
NIBBLE mode
It is an asynchronous reverse channel mode to send the data from
the printer to the host. In Nibble mode, 4-bit data (half byte) is sent at
a time using the 4 status lines (FAULT, SELECT, PE, and BUSY). To
send one complete byte data, the printer sends 2 nibbles (8 bits in
total) to the host. Nibble mode is usually combined with Compatible
mode to create a complete bi-directional channel.
ECP mode
ECP mode permits bi-directional asynchronous data transmission,
and by means of interlock handshake, it does not require the timing
necessary with Compatible mode.
IEEE1284 compatible
2-61
CL-S6621
Interface
(2) Signal line and pin assignment
Pin No.
1
2-9
10
11
12
13
Signal name
STROBE
DATA0-7
ACKNLG
BUSY
PERROR
SELECT
I/O
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
AUTOFD
NC
SGND
FGND
P.L.H
GND
PRIME
FAULT
GND
NC
Input
------Output
--Input
Output
-----
Function in Compatible Mode
Strobe signal to read in 8-bit data
8-bit parallel signal
8-bit data request signal
Signal specifying printer busy
Signal specifying media end
Signal specifying if the printer is on-line (printing enabled)
or off-line
Invalid (ignored)
Not used
Signal ground
Frame ground
Peripheral logic high (pulled up to +5V at 1KΩ)
Ground for twisted pair return
Printer reset
Signal specifying printer error
Signal ground
Not used
35
NC
---
Not used
36
SELECTIN
Input
Invalid (ignored)
14
15
16
17
18
19-30
31
32
33
34
(3) Parallel port status signals when an error occurs
The following table shows the status signal change when an error occurs.
Under the specifications for this bi-directional parallel interface, the parallel port status signals
when an error occurs are, as shown below, partially processed differently than with Compatible
mode used up till now. When bi-directional parallel interface is on in the setting menu, even if a
printer error has occurred, the BUSY signal line is not active ("H").
Error
Compatible mode
Paper end
Busy:
L→H
PError: L → H
Select: H → L
Fault:
H→L
Error other than paper Busy:
end
PError:
• Head open
Select:
• Other
Fault:
Conditions for Busy
CL-S6621
L→H
L→ unchanged
H→L
H→L
• Receive buffer full
• Data being read
• Error
2-62
Interface
(4) Compatible timing specification
[When power is on] (Timing to go on-line)
Power On
Reset
BUSY
ACK
SELECT
[While receiving data]
Data0~7
Strobe
BUSY
0.5µs
0.5µs
0.5µs
Note: BUSY goes “High” at the falling edge of Strobe, and data is latched at the leading edge
of Strobe.
2-63
CL-S6621
Interface
[While receiving PRIME signal]
10~15µsec or more
PRIME
BUSY
Ack
Fault
SELECT
Note: If the PRIME signal width is 10 µsec or less, it is not accepted.
BUSY goes to “High” when the PRIME signal is accepted by the printer.
[Timing relationship between BUSY and ACK]
Center
BUSY
ACK
About 2 µsec
CL-S6621
2-64
CHAPTER 3
DISASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE
3-1
CL-S6621
CHAPTER 3
DISASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3-1. Maintenance Precautions ............................................................................................... 3-4
3-2. Cleaning.......................................................................................................................... 3-5
3-3. Lubrication ...................................................................................................................... 3-5
3-3-1. Lubrication frequency......................................................................................... 3-5
3-3-2. Types of lubricant ............................................................................................... 3-5
3-3-3. Quantity of lubricant ........................................................................................... 3-5
3-3-4. Adhesive ............................................................................................................ 3-5
3-4. Maintenance Tools List ................................................................................................... 3-6
3-5. Quick Detachment of Major Parts ................................................................................... 3-7
3-5-1. SA, Head............................................................................................................ 3-7
3-5-2. SA2 Platen ......................................................................................................... 3-8
3-6. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication .................................................................... 3-9
3-6-1. “Cover Top” and “Support Top Cover” ................................................................ 3-10
(1) Removing the “Cover Top” Block ............................................................... 3-10
(2) Removing the “Cover Top” and “Support Top Cover” ................................ 3-11
3-6-2. Unit, Ribbon ....................................................................................................... 3-12
3-6-3. Case U ............................................................................................................... 3-14
(1) Removing the “Case U” Block ................................................................... 3-14
(2) Removing the “Case U” ............................................................................. 3-17
3-6-4. SA, Fan .............................................................................................................. 3-18
(1) Removing the ribbon covers...................................................................... 3-18
(2) Removing the “SA, Fan” ............................................................................ 3-18
3-6-5. Ribbon Gears ..................................................................................................... 3-19
3-6-6. “SA Ribbon Motor F/R” and “SA, Ribbon PCB” .................................................. 3-21
3-6-7. “Holder, Ribbon Shaft” and “Holder 2 Tension Spring” ....................................... 3-22
3-6-8. “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R” and “SA Ribbon Frame” ........................................... 3-23
3-6-9. “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” and “SA, Ribbon Sensor” on the front side ......... 3-25
3-6-10. “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R” and “SA, Tension Sensor” on the rear side ........ 3-26
3-6-11. “Unit, Control Panel”, “SA PNE Sensor”, “SA, Relay PCB” and
“SA, Main PCB” ............................................................................................................. 3-27
(1) Unit, Control Panel .................................................................................... 3-27
(2) SA PNE Sensor ......................................................................................... 3-27
(3) “SA, Relay PCB” and “SA, Main PCB” ...................................................... 3-28
3-6-12. SA, Opepane PCB ............................................................................................. 3-30
3-6-13. “Unit, Mechanism”, “Unit, Power Supply” and “Case L” ..................................... 3-31
(1) Unit, Mechanism........................................................................................ 3-31
(2) Unit, Power Supply .................................................................................... 3-32
(3) Case L ....................................................................................................... 3-34
3-6-14. SA2 Platen ......................................................................................................... 3-35
3-6-15. Unit, Sensor U.................................................................................................... 3-36
3-6-16. “SA TRA Sen PCB” and “Gear Bevel Lead Screw U”......................................... 3-38
3-6-17. Unit, Head .......................................................................................................... 3-41
CL-S6621
3-2
3-6-18. “SA, Head”, “Cam Head Balance” and “Cam Head Adjust”................................ 3-42
(1) SA, Head ................................................................................................... 3-42
(2) Cam Head Balance ................................................................................... 3-43
(3) Cam Head Adjust....................................................................................... 3-45
3-6-19. SA PF Motor....................................................................................................... 3-47
3-6-20. “Carriage Adjust Sensor L”, “SA, Head Up Switch” and “SA Ref Sen PCB”....... 3-47
(1) “Carriage Adjust Sensor L” and “SA, Head Up Switch” ............................. 3-47
(2) SA Ref Sen PCB........................................................................................ 3-50
3-6-21. Gears ................................................................................................................. 3-51
3-6-22. “Lever Head Lock” and “SA Main Frame R” ....................................................... 3-52
3-6-23. “Frame Main”, “SA Main Frame L” and “Plate Peel Guide” ................................ 3-53
3-6-24. Disassembling the “Roll Paper Shaft” ................................................................ 3-54
3-7. Adjustments .................................................................................................................... 3-55
3-7-1. Transparent/Reflective Sensor Position Adjustment .......................................... 3-55
(1) Sensor position adjustment (factory mode) ............................................... 3-55
(2) Sensor sensitivity adjustment (maintenance mode) .................................. 3-55
3-7-2. Ribbon Slant Elimination Adjustment ................................................................. 3-60
(1) Ribbon slant elimination adjustment.......................................................... 3-60
3-3
CL-S6621
Maintenance Precautions
3-1.
Maintenance Precautions
Warning
• Before starting disassembly/reassembly or mechanical adjustment, be sure to
disconnect the power cord from the power source.
Caution
• Do not disassemble/reassemble or adjust the machine, if it functions properly.
Particularly, do not loosen screws on any component, unless necessary.
• After completing an inspection and before turning on the power, be sure to check that
there is no abnormality.
• Never try to print without media.
• Check that the media is properly set.
• Do not lay anything on the cover or lean against it during maintenance or while the
printer is in operation.
• During maintenance, be careful not to leave parts or screws unattached or loose
inside the printer.
• When handling a printed circuit board, do not use gloves, etc., which can easily
cause static electricity. Since ICs, such as CPU, RAM and ROM, might be destroyed
by static electricity, do not touch lead wires or windows unnecessarily.
• Do not put the printed circuit boards directly on the printer or on the floor.
• When disassembling or reassembling, check wires for any damage and do not pinch
or damage them. Also, run wires as they were.
CL-S6621
3-4
Cleaning, Lubrication
3-2.
Cleaning
Cleaning spots are listed below.
Cleaning Position
Cabinet
SA, Head
SA2 Platen
Media running surface
Description
Wipe soiled parts of the printer with a clean dry cloth. Remove bits
of media, etc., using tweezers.
Note: When cleaning, be careful not to scratch the equipment or to
bend parts, etc.
Clean the thermal head with the head cleaner only.
Clean the platen with a soft cloth.
Wipe off media refuse, etc., on and around the media running
surface including the “SA2 Platen”.
Clean inside the printer in accordance with the following:
• Cleaning frequency: Every 6 months or 300 hours of operation. (Whichever comes first)
• Materials:
Dry cloth (gauze or soft cloth) and thermal head cleaner
3-3.
Lubrication
3-3-1. Lubrication frequency
This is a maintenance-free machine and requires no lubrication under normal use. However,
the machine should be lubricated whenever it is disassembled and reassembled, or when
lubricated parts are cleaned.
The parts to be lubricated are indicated in the disassemble procedure with the mark .
3-3-2. Types of lubricant
• Floil G-311S (by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.)
• Floil G-474C (by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.)
3-3-3. Quantity of lubricant
Small quantity..........  .............
Ordinary quantity ....  .........
Large quantity..........  .......
About 1 drop.
About 3 to 4 drops.
About 0.2 mm thick for grease.
Apply sufficiently.
3-3-4. Adhesive
• LOCTITE263 (by Henkel AG & Co. KGaA)
3-5
CL-S6621
Maintenance Tools List
3-4.
Maintenance Tools List
Maintenance tools shown below are needed when replacing the maintenance parts such as the
“SA, Main PCB”, “SA PF Motor”, etc.
Maintenance Tools List
No.
1
4
Name
Phillips Screwdriver
(Length 200 mm)
Phillips Screwdriver
(Length 100 mm)
Flat-blade Screwdriver
(Length 100 mm)
Nut driver
5
6
7
8
9
Tweezers
Round Nose Pliers
Cutting Nippers
Soldering Iron (30W)
Volt-ohm Meter
2
3
CL-S6621
Q'ty
1
Description
Bit: #0, #1, #2
1
Bit: #0, #1, #2
1
4.3 mm width
1
1
1
1
1
1
3-6
4 mm
Remarks
Quick Detachment of Major Parts
3-5.
Quick Detachment of Major Parts
How to quickly detach the following major parts separately is explained here.
• SA, Head
• SA2 Platen
3-5-1. SA, Head
Caution
• When detaching or reinstalling the "SA, Head", be careful not to damage the thermal
elements. Especially, avoid contacting the thermal elements with a metal part, etc.
Do not touch the thermal elements of the “SA, Head” with your bare hand.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the “Cover Top” Block.
Push the “Lever Head Lock” () and open the Ribbon & Head Block ().
Remove the 2 screws (NO.1, TFH (6-0.7), M3.0x6 (NI)) () and detach the “SA, Head” ().
Disconnect the 2 connectors ( and ) from the “SA, Head”.
NOTE: To disconnect the connector (), unlock the connector lock.
Ribbon & Head Block
"Cover Top" Block
SA, Head
NO.1, TFH (6-0.7),
M3.0x6 (NI)
Lever Head Lock
Notes on reassembling:
• The Ribbon & Head Block has two bosses that allow easy positioning of the “SA, Head”. When
assembling the “SA, Head”, be sure that it is securely engaged with the Ribbon & Head Block.
• Insert the connectors firmly.
3-7
CL-S6621
Quick Detachment of Major Parts
3-5-2. SA2 Platen
1. Open the “Cover Top” and then the ribbon & head Block.
2. While pressing the part “A” of the “SA2 Platen”, lift the right end of the “SA2 Platen” a little.
(See the arrow “a”.)
Next, move it to the right and then remove it from the printer by lifting it upwardly. (See the
arrow “b”.)
=
>
)
Note on reassembling:
• After reassembling the “SA2 Platen”, be sure that it is securely engaged with the main body.
CL-S6621
3-8
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6.
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
[Disassembly Flowchart for Major Parts]
CL-S6621
Roll Paper Shaft
SA, Head
(See 3-5-1.)
SA2 Platen
(See 3-5-2.)
(See 3-6-1.)
Cover Top
Unit, Ribbon
Case U
(See 3-6-24.)
(See 3-6-2.)
(See 3-6-3.)
(See 3-6-4.)
Ribbon Gears
(See 3-6-5.)
SA Ribbon Motor F
(See 3-6-6.)
SA Ribbon Motor R
(See 3-6-6.)
SA, Ribbon PCB
(See 3-6-6.)
SA, Ribbon Sensor
(See 3-6-9/10.)
(See 3-6-12.)
SA, Opepane PCB
SA PNE Sensor
SA, Fan
(See 3-6-11(2).)
(See 3-6-13(2).)
Unit, Power Supply
(See 3-6-11(3).)
Cover Main PCB
SA, Relay PCB
(See 3-6-11(3).)
SA, Main PCB
(See 3-6-11(3).)
(See 3-6-13(1).)
Unit, Mechanism
Unit, Power Supply
Case L
(See 3-6-13(3).)
(See 3-6-13(2).)
SA2 Platen
Unit, Sensor U
(See 3-6-14.)
SA TRA Sen PCB (See 3-6-16.)
(See 3-6-15.)
Unit, Head
SA, Head
(See 3-6-18.)
(See 3-6-17.)
SA PF Motor
(See 3-6-19.)
SA, Head Up Switch
SA Ref Sen PCB
3-9
(See 3-6-20(1).)
(See 3-6-20(2).)
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-1. “Cover Top” and “Support Top Cover”
(1) Removing the “Cover Top” Block
1. Before starting, remove the “SA, Ribbon Holder” (2 pcs.) from the printer.
2. Open the “Cover Top” Block half way as shown in the figure. (Do not fully open it.)
3. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the right side corner of the “Cover Top” Block as shown,
then push the “Plate A” outward with the screwdriver end. (The projections of the “Cover
Top” Block come off the main body.)
Then, remove the “Cover Top” Block. (At this moment, a sound may be heard to some
degree.)
Note on reassembling:
• First, with the opening angle of the “Cover Top” Block set as shown, insert the protrusion “B”
on the left side of the “Cover Top” Block into the hole in the main body.
Next, align the protrusion “C” with the hole “C’ ”, and, while pushing the “Plate A” outward
again with the flat-bladed screwdriver, insert the right side corner of the “Cover Top” Block
into the main body.
CL-S6621
3-10
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
(2) Removing the “Cover Top” and “Support Top Cover”
The “Cover Top” Block forms a double structure where the outer cover is the “Cover Top” and
the inner cover is the “Support Top Cover”.
1. Remove the 4 screws (PHT (PT2T), M3x14) and pull out the left side of the “Support Top
Cover” until it stops. (It hits the stopper “A” and stops.)
2. Bend the “Support Top Cover” inward to keep away from the stopper “A”.
3. Pull out the right side of the “Support Top Cover” until it stops. (It hits the stoppers “B” and
stops.)
4. Bend the “Support Top Cover” inward to keep away from the stoppers “B”, and then remove
the “Support Top Cover” upwardly.
5. Remove the “Label, Main Guidance” and “Label Caution Cover Open” from the “Support
Top Cover”.
6. Remove the “Window” and “Window Side” (2 pcs.) from the “Cover Top”.
NOTE: When removing the “Window Side”, first, remove the 2 claws “C”, and then “D”.
7. Remove the “Label CL-S6621” and “Logo Citizen L” from the “Cover Top”.
PHT (PT2T), M3x14
Label Caution Cover Open
Label, Main Guidance
PHT (PT2T), M3x14
Support Top Cover
Window
B
A
C
D
C
Logo Citizen L
Window Side
Cover Top
C
D
C
Window Side
Label CL-S6621
Notes on reassembling:
• Place the “Window” so that 3 bosses of the “Cover Top” are inserted into respective holes in
the “Window”.
• When assembling the “Window Side” on the “Cover Top”, first hook the claws “C” and then
the claw “D”.
3-11
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-2. Unit, Ribbon
Caution
• Forbidden screws in the “Unit, Ribbon”
DO NOT loosen the 10 screws of the “SA Ribbon Frame”. The “SA Ribbon Frame”
consists of three parts and is assembled with the 10 screws.
Once the “SA Ribbon Frame” is disassembled, correct ribbon running cannot be
assured. Therefore, a ribbon wrinkle may not be removed with the Ribbon Left-Right
Balance Adjustment Knobs (Front/Rear), as expected.
Unit, Ribbon
SA Ribbon Frame
5 screws
DO NOT LOOSEN
5 screws
DO NOT LOOSEN
Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knobs (Front/Rear)
CL-S6621
3-12
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
1. Remove the “Cover Top” Block. Refer to “3-6-1(1) Removing the “Cover Top” Block“.
2. Remove the 4 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “Unit, Ribbon” by lifting it upwardly. At
this time, disconnect 1 connector (J102) from the “Unit, Ribbon”.
Unit, Ribbon
BH, M3x4 (NI)
J102
Notes on reassembling:
• Seat the cable (J102) on the “Plate Ribbon Cable Stay” as shown below.
• When assembling the “Unit, Ribbon”, be sure that it is securely seated on the main body.
The 2 protrusions on the bottom of the “Unit, Ribbon” are naturally inserted in the respective
holes “A” of the main body for positioning the “Unit, Ribbon”.
Plate Ribbon Cable Stay
J102
A
3-13
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-3. Case U
(1) Removing the “Case U” Block
1. Remove the “Cover Top” Block. Refer to “3-6-1(1) Removing the “Cover Top” Block“.
2. Remove the “Unit, Ribbon”. Refer to “3-6-2 Unit, Ribbon”.
3. Remove the 1 screw (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “Cover Cable”.
4. When an optional peeler or cutter is installed, remove the 1 screw (PHT (PT2T), M3x14)
and detach the “Cover Connector”.
5. Open the Head Block by pressing the “Lever Head Lock”.
NOTE: This step is required as the “Knob Guide Paper U” extends beyond the “Case U”
Block.
6. Lift the “Case U” Block to the half-way height, and while lowering the Head Block a little,
remove the “Case U” upwardly.
NOTE: As the front edge of the “Case U” Block is directly beneath the stopper part” (5
pcs.) of the “Leaf Case U”, avoid these stopper part when lifting the “Case U”
Block”.
7. After removing the “Case U” Block, detach the “Leaf Case U” upwardly
Stopper part (5 pcs.)
Leaf Case U
PHT (PT2T), M3x14
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Cover Connector
Cover Cable
PHT (PT2T), M3x14
"Case U" Block
Cover Cable
Hook
Knob Guide Paper U
Head Block
Lever Head Lock
CL-S6621
3-14
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
Notes on reassembling:
• When assembling the “Case U” Block, do not forget to open the Head Block and the “Knob
Guide Paper U”. Otherwise, the extended “Knob Guide Paper U” gets caught between the
“Case U” Block and the main body.
• After assembling the “Case U” Block, install the “Leaf Case U” as follows.
NOTE: While inserting the “Leaf Case U” (thin metal), carefully handle it so as not to
deform it.
1) While aligning both edges of the “Leaf Case U” with those of the part “A” (a part of the
“Case L”), insert the “Leaf Case U” into the main body (between the part “A” and the
“Case U” Block) until the ends of claws (4 pcs.) securely fit to the grooves (4 pcs.) on
the “Case U” Block.
NOTE: Do not insert it downward too much, as its stoppers will be bent.
2) To be sure if the “Leaf Case U” is securely inserted, move it a little. If the claws of the
“Leaf Case U” are securely engaged with the grooves of the “Case U” Block, the “Leaf
Case U” does not move.
Leaf Case
ase U
Stopper part (5 pcs.)
Claw
Stopper part
Claw (4 pcs.)
Groove (4 pcs.)
("Case U" Block)
"A"
(Case L)
• Assemble the “Cover Cable” so that the hook of the main body is correctly inserted into the
rectangle hole of the “Cover Cable” as shown in the magnified view.
(to be continued on the next page)
3-15
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
• When once the “Unit, Mechanism” was removed (Paper path adjustment):
When once the “Unit, Mechanism” was removed in “3-6-13(1) Unit, Mechanism”, you need
to perform the following paper path adjustment after reassembling the “Case U” Block.
NOTE: If you haven’t removed the “Unit, Mechanism”, you don’t need to perform this
adjustment.
This procedure is to align the position of the “Unit, Mechanism” with the “Case U” Block. So,
you need to shift the “Unit, Mechanism” a little after loosening its screws.
1) Before starting, be sure that the “Case U” Block is already assembled in the printer.
2) Loosen (do not remove) 8 screws that fasten the “Unit, Mechanism” to the printer.
3) Open the “SA, Head” Block.
4) Open the “Unit, Sensor U”.
5) Set a ruler along the 5 places (2 places (,) of the “Unit, Mechanism” and 3 places
(,,) of the “Case U” Block.
6) Move the “Unit, Mechanism” so that 5 places are aligned in line.
7) Close the “Unit, Sensor U” and “SA, Head” Block, and then fasten the 8 screws to fix
the “Unit, Mechanism”.
8 screws
"SA, Head" Block
Unit, Sensor U
CL-S6621
3-16
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
(2) Removing the “Case U”
1. Remove the “Case U” Block. Refer to the above “(1) Removing the “Case U” Block”
2. Remove the “Cover Front” upwardly.
3. Remove the 1 screw (PHT (PT2T), M3x14) and detach the “Cover Connector”.
4. Remove the 1 screw (PH, M5x15 (NI)) and 1 nut ((#3), M5 (NI)), and detach the “Damper
Cover”.
5. Remove labels (“Label Rating” and “Label Caution”) from the “Case U”.
PHT (PT2T), M3x14
Cover Connector
PH, M5x15 (NI)
Damper Cover
(#3), M5 (NI)
Label Caution
Cover Front
Label Rating
Case U
Note on reassembling
• When assembling the “Damper Cover”, tighten the screw while pushing down the “Damper
Cover”.
3-17
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-4. SA, Fan
(1) Removing the ribbon covers
1. Open the “Cover Top” Block and remove the “Unit, Ribbon”. Refer to “3-6-2 Unit, Ribbon”.
2. On the right, remove the 2 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “Cover Ribbon Frame
R”.
3. On the left, remove the 2 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan” to
the left after lifting it to unhook the claws “A” from the chassis.
)
! *
+*
Note on reassembling:
• When assembling the “Cover Ribbon Frame R”, pass the wires of the front side cable
through the opening “B” (not “C”).
(2) Removing the “SA, Fan”
1. Remove the 4 screws (PHT (#2), M3x6) and 4 washers (Plain, 3x8x0.5), and detach the
“Bracket Ribbon Fan” (2 pcs.).
2. Remove the “SA, Fan” from the “Cover Ribbon Frame L”.
Cover Ribbon Frame L
SA, Fan
Bracket Ribbon Fan
Plain, 3x8x0.5
J106
PHT (#2), M3x6
CL-S6621
3-18
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
Note on reassembling:
• When assembling the “SA, Fan”, pass the cable
between the boss and the frame as shown on the right.
(Wind the cable on the boss counterclockwise.)
Boss
J106
3-6-5. Ribbon Gears
1. Open the “Cover Top” Block and remove the “Unit, Ribbon”. Refer to “3-6-2 Unit, Ribbon”.
2. Remove the ribbon covers. Refer to “3-6-4(1) Removing the ribbon covers”.
3. On the front side, remove the 1 screw (No.0PH (4-0.3)M2x3 (NI)) () and “Plate Ribbon
Washer”. Then, remove the “SA, Holder R Shaft”, “Spring Ribbon Shaft”, “Spring Ribbon
Return” and “Gear Ribbon Shaft F” in that order.
4. Also on the front side, disengage the “Polyslider, Knob-2” and remove the “Gear Reduction
Ribbon 2” (), “Gear Reduction Ribbon 1” (), “Gear Reduction Ribbon 3” (), and “Gear
Idle Ribbon” () in that order.
5. On the rear side, remove the 1 screw (No.0PH (4-0.3)M2x3 (NI)) () and “Plate Ribbon
Washer”. Then, remove the “SA, Holder R Shaft”, “Spring Ribbon Shaft”, “Spring Ribbon
Return” and “Gear Ribbon Shaft R” in that order.
6. Also on the rear side, disengage the “Polyslider, Knob-2” and remove the “Gear Reduction
Ribbon 2” (), “Gear Reduction Ribbon 1” (), “Gear Reduction Ribbon 3” (), and “Gear
Idle Ribbon” () in that order.
Gear Ribbon Shaft R
[Magnified View]
Spring Ribbon Return
FLOIL G-474C
Spring Ribbon Shaft
SA, Holder R Shaft
Plate Ribbon Washer
No.0PH (4-0.3)M2x3 (NI)
10
Gear Idle Ribbon
Gear Reduction Ribbon 1
9
Gear Reduction Ribbon 3
7
Gear Reduction Ribbon 2
Polyslider, Knob-02
Gear Ribbon Shaft F
Spring Ribbon Return
Spring Ribbon Shaft
SA, Holder R Shaft
Gear Reduction
Plate Ribbon Washer
Ribbon 1
Gear Idle Ribbon
No.0PH (4-0.3)M2x3 (NI)
8
Gear Reduction Ribbon 3
Polyslider, Knob-02
Gear Reduction Ribbon 2
3-19
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
Notes on reassembling:
• Distinguish the “Gear Ribbon Shaft F” from the “Gear Ribbon Shaft R”, referring to the following
projection.
Gear Ribbon Shaft F
Gear Ribbon Shaft R
Projection
• On the front side, assemble the “SA, Holder R Shaft”, “Spring Ribbon Shaft”, and “Spring Ribbon
Return” on the “Gear Ribbon Shaft F”.
Apply FLOIL G-311S to both ends of the “Spring Ribbon Shaft”. Refer to the  marks shown in
the left figure below.
• On the rear side, assemble the “SA, Holder R Shaft”, “Spring Ribbon Shaft”, and “Spring Ribbon
Return” on the “Gear Ribbon Shaft R”.
Apply FLOIL G-311S to both ends of the “Spring Ribbon Shaft”. Refer to the  marks shown in
the right figure below.
[Front side]
[Rear side]
Gear Ribbon Shaft R
Gear Ribbon Shaft F
Spring Ribbon Return
Spring Ribbon Return
SA, Holder R Shaft
SA, Holder R Shaft
Spring Ribbon Shaft
Spring Ribbon Shaft
FLOIL G-311S
• Apply FLOIL G-474C to the parts (gears and shafts) shown by the  marks. (Refer to the figure
on the previous page.)
CL-S6621
3-20
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-6. “SA Ribbon Motor F/R” and “SA, Ribbon PCB”
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Open the “Cover Top” Block and remove the “Unit, Ribbon”. Refer to “3-6-2 Unit, Ribbon”.
Remove the ribbon covers. Refer to “3-6-4(1) Removing the ribbon covers”.
Disconnect 2 connectors (J101 and J107) from the “SA, Ribbon PCB”.
On the front side, remove the 2 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “SA Ribbon Motor F”.
Disconnect 1 connector (J103) from the “SA, Ribbon PCB”.
On the rear side, remove the 2 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “SA Ribbon Motor R”.
Remove the 2 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)), and detach the “SA, Ribbon PCB”.
SA Ribbon Motor R
BH, M3x4 (NI)
BH, M3x4 (NI)
J103
SA, Ribbon PCB
J105
BH, M3x4 (NI)
J107
J101
J104
SA Ribbon Motor F
Note on reassembling:
• Correctly connect each connector.
To SA Ribbon Motor F
To SA Ribbon Motor F
(for thermistor)
To SA, Fan
J106
To SA Ribbon Motor R
J103
To SA, Ribbon Sensor
(on the rear side)
J105
J107
J101
SA, Ribbon PCB
J104
J102
To SA, Ribbon Sensor
(on the front side)
To SA, Main PCB
3-21
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-7. “Holder, Ribbon Shaft” and “Holder 2 Tension Spring”
1. Open the “Cover Top” Block .
2. Release the lock by moving the part “A” toward the right and remove the “Holder, Ribbon
Shaft” (2 pcs.) toward the front.
3. Remove the 2 screws (PHT (#2), M3x6) and detach the “Holder 2 Tension Spring”.
PHT (#2), M3x6
Holder, Ribbon Shaft
Holder 2 Tension Spring
Holder, Ribbon Shaft
)
CL-S6621
3-22
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-8. “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R” and “SA Ribbon Frame”
Caution
• DO NOT loosen the 10 screws of the “SA Ribbon Frame”. The “SA Ribbon Frame”
consists of three parts and is assembled with the 10 screws.
Once the “SA Ribbon Frame” is disassembled, correct ribbon running cannot be
assured. Therefore, a ribbon wrinkle may not be removed with the Ribbon Left-Right
Balance Adjustment Knobs (Front/Rear), as expected.
SA Ribbon Frame
5 screws
DO NOT LOOSEN
5 screws
DO NOT LOOSEN
1. Open the “Cover Top” Block and remove the “Unit, Ribbon”. Refer to “3-6-2 Unit, Ribbon”.
2. Remove the ribbon covers. Refer to “3-6-4(1) Removing the ribbon covers”.
3. Remove the 4 screws (No.0PH (4-0.3)M2x3 (NI)) and detach the “Cover Ribbon Tension
Sensor” (2 pcs.) on the front and rear sides.
4. On the front side, remove the 2 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor
F”.
5. On the rear side, remove the 2 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor
R”.
6. Peel off the “Label Ribbon Tension Adjust” from the “SA Ribbon Frame”.
No.0PH (4-0.3)M2x3 (NI)
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Cover Ribbon
Tension Sensor
Cover Ribbon
Tension Sensor
A
No.0PH (4-0.3)
M2x3 (NI)
B
BH, M3x4 (NI)
J104
Unit, Ribbon
Sensor F
J105
Unit, Ribbon Sensor R
Label Ribbon Tension Adjust
SA Ribbon Frame
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE
3-23
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
Notes on reassembling:
• Be sure that the end of wire spring (“A”/”B” in the above figure) of the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor
F”/“Unit, Ribbon Sensor R” is set under the “Cover Ribbon Tension Sensor” as shown below.
[Example of “A”]
A
Spring end
Cover Ribbon
Tension Sensor
Unit, Ribbon
Tension Shaft F
• After assembling the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F”/“Unit, Ribbon Sensor R”, perform “3-7-2 Ribbon
Slant Elimination Adjustment”.
CL-S6621
3-24
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-9. “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” and “SA, Ribbon Sensor” on the
front side
1. Open the “Cover Top” Block and remove the “Unit, Ribbon”. Refer to “3-6-2 Unit, Ribbon”.
2. Remove the ribbon covers. Refer to “3-6-4(1) Removing the ribbon covers”.
3. Remove the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F”. Refer to “3-6-8 “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R” and “SA
Ribbon Frame””.
4. Release the “Bush Ribbon Roller” (2 pcs.) () at both ends. First, lift its end with the blade of a
flat-blade screwdriver or the like (“a”) and then turn it by approx. 90 degrees (“b”). (See the
magnified view.) Next, remove the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” Block, and then the “Bush
Ribbon Roller” (2 pcs.).
5. Peel off the “Sheet Static Eliminator 6621” from the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” Block.
6. Remove the 2 screws (No.0, TFH (PT4-0.5), M2.), and detach the “Interrupter Ribbon Sensor”
and “Holder Tension Spring 1” from the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” ().
7. Remove the 1 screw (PH (PW), M2x8) (), and detach the “Lever Tension Adjust F” Block and
“Shaft Tension Adjust”.
8. Remove the 2 Screws (No.0, TFH (PT4-0.5), M2) (), and detach the ”Knob, Tension Adjust”
from the “Lever Tension Adjust F”.
9. Remove the 1 screw (No.0, TFH (PT4-0.5), M2), and detach the “Holder Tension Spring 2” and
“Spring Ribbon Tension” (2 pcs.) from the “Lever Tension Adjust F”.
10. Remove the 2 screws (No.0PH (4-0.3)M2x3 (NI)) (), and detach the “SA, Ribbon Sensor”
from the “Plate Ribbon Tension Sensor”.
SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F
Holder Tension Spring 2
Interrupter Ribbon
Sensor
Spring Ribbon Tension
Holder Tension Spring 1
Sheet Static Eliminator 6621
No.0, TFH (PT4-0.5), M2.
PH (PW), M2x8
Lever Tension Adjust F
No.0, TFH (PT4-0.5), M2
No.0, TFH (PT4-0.5), M2
Knob, Tension, Adjust
Shaft Tension Adjust
Bush Ribbon Roller
b
a
J104
No.0PH (4-0.3)M2x3 (NI)
SA, Ribbon Sensor
FLOIL G-311S
Plate Ribbon Tension Sensor
Bush Ribbon Roller
Note on reassembling:
• Apply FLOIL G-311S to the slits (4 places) shown by the  marks.
3-25
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-10. “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R” and “SA, Tension Sensor” on the
rear side
1. Open the “Cover Top” Block and remove the “Unit, Ribbon”. Refer to “3-6-2 Unit, Ribbon”.
2. Remove the ribbon covers. Refer to “3-6-4(1) Removing the ribbon covers”.
3. Remove the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor R”. Refer to “3-6-8 “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R” and “SA
Ribbon Frame””.
4. Release the “Bush Ribbon Roller” (2 pcs.) () at both ends. First, lift its end with the blade of a
flat-blade screwdriver or the like (“a”) and then turn it by approx. 90 degrees (“b”). (See the
magnified view.) Next, remove the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R” Block, and then the “Bush
Ribbon Roller” (2 pcs.).
5. Remove the 2 screws (No.0, TFH (PT4-0.5), M2.), and detach the “Interrupter Ribbon Sensor”
and “Holder Tension Spring 1” from the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R” ().
6. Remove the 1 screw (PH (PW), M2x8) (), and detach the “Lever Tension Adjust R” Block and
“Shaft Tension Adjust”.
7. Remove the 2 Screws (No.0, TFH (PT4-0.5), M2) (), and detach the ”Knob, Tension Adjust”
from the “Lever Tension Adjust R”.
8. Remove the 1 screw (No.0, TFH (PT4-0.5), M2), and detach the “Holder Tension Spring 2” and
“Spring Ribbon Tension” (2 pcs.) from the “Lever Tension Adjust R”.
9. Remove the 2 screws (No.0PH (4-0.3)M2x3 (NI)) (), and detach the “SA, Ribbon Sensor”
from the “Plate Ribbon Tension Sensor”.
SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R
Interrupter Ribbon Sensor
Holder Tension Spring 1
Lever Tension Adjust R
Shaft Tension Adjust
PH (PW), M2x8
J105
Bush Ribbon
Roller
No.0, TFH (PT4-0.5), M2.
No.0, TFH (PT4-0.5), M2
No.0PH (4-0.3)
M2x3 (NI)
No.0, TFH (PT4-0.5), M2
Knob, Tension, Adjust
Plate Ribbon
Tension Sensor
Holder Tension Spring 2
Spring Ribbon Tension
SA, Ribbon Sensor
Bush Ribbon Roller
a
b
FLOIL G-311S
Note on reassembling:
• Apply FLOIL G-311S to the slits (4 places) shown by the  marks.
CL-S6621
3-26
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-11. “Unit, Control Panel”, “SA PNE Sensor”, “SA, Relay PCB” and
“SA, Main PCB”
(1) Unit, Control Panel
1. Remove the “Case U”. Refer to “3-6-3(1) Removing the “Case U” Block”.
3. Remove the “Unit, Control Panel” upwardly by releasing the hooks (2 pcs.).
4. Remove the “Cushion, Ope-Pane Cable” and disconnect the “Cable, Opepane” from the
“Unit, Control Panel” ().
Note on reassembling:
• When connecting the flexible cable, be sure that the insertion direction is correct. If you
insert it reversely, circuit is not electrically connected. (Its foil side faces to the right.)
(2) SA PNE Sensor
1. Disconnect the connector (J12), remove the 1 screw (BH, M3x4 (NI)), and detach the “SA
PNE Sensor” Block.
2. Remove the 2 screws (PH, M2x4) and detach the “SA PNE Sensor” () from the “Holder
PNE”.
BH, M3x4 (NI)
BH, M3x4 (NI)
SA PNE Sensor
BH, M3x4 (NI)
PH, M2x4
Spacer PNE
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Holder PNE
PHT
(#2), M3x6
J12
Cover Main PCB
"Plate Main PCB"
Block
Cable, Opepane
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Cushion, Ope-Pane Cable
Unit, Control Panel
J4
J15
Wire Tie
SA Power Cable
3-27
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
(3) “SA, Relay PCB” and “SA, Main PCB”
1. Remove the 4 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “Cover Main PCB” Block.
2. Remove the 1 screw (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “Spacer PNE” from the “Cover Main
PCB” ().
3. Disconnect all cables from the “SA, Main PCB”.
• J3 (with hook), J4, J5, J6, J7, J8, J9, J11, J15, J19 (with hook)
To SA PNE Sensor
To SA TRA Sen PCB
To SA Ref Sen PCB
To SA, Head Up Switch
J12
SA, Main PCB
J8
J202
RS232C
J9
J11
(J14)
J16
J17
To SA Motor PF
J7
J5
J6
J3
J4
USB2.0
J18
J19
J201
SA, Relay PCB
To SA Motor PF
(for thermistor)
(J10) (J13)
To SA, Head
(for signals)
To SA, Head
(for power)
To SA, Ribbon PCB
J15
To SA, Power Supply
To optional I/F PCB (Option)
To SA, Opepane PCB
4. Remove the 3 screws (PHT (#2), M3x6) and 2 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)), and then detach the
“Plate Main PCB” Block (). (See the figure on the previous page.)
5. Cut the “Wire Tie”, disconnect the “SA Power Cable” from the main body to remove it.
6. Remove the 2 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “SA, Relay PCB” () from the “SA,
Main PCB”. Then, remove the “Spacer (M3 H20mm)” (2 pcs.). (See the following figure.)
7. Remove the 2 “Lock Screw (Inch)” and 4 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)), and detach the “SA, Main
PCB” () and “Sheet Insulation Main PCB”.
8. Remove the 2 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)), and detach the “Plate, I/F Cover” from the “Plate
Main PCB”.
BH, M3x4 (NI)
BH, M3x4 (NI)
SA, Main PCB
BH, M3x4 (NI)
SA, Relay PCB
Spacer
(M3 H20mm)
Plate, I/F Cover
Lock Screw (Inch)
Sheet Insulation Main PCB
Plate Main PCB
CL-S6621
3-28
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
Notes on reassembling:
• When the “SA, Main PCB” is replaced with new one, perform the sensor adjustment. Refer to
“3-7-1 Transparent/Reflective Sensor Position Adjustment.
• When running the “Cable, Opepane”, pass it inner side of the case arms “A”. Also, after running
the “Cable, Opepane”, stick it to the case frame at point “B” with a double-faced tape.
A
B
J4
Cable, Opepane
• When connecting the flexible cable, be sure that the insertion direction is correct. If you insert it
reversely, circuit is not electrically connected.
• For the “Cable, Opepane” connected to the connector (J4), face its foil side to the rear of the
printer.
• For the cable (J9), face up its foil side.
J12
(J10) (J13)
(Foil side)
J8
J9
J11
(J14)
J9
J7
(Blue tape side)
J5
To SA TRA Sen PCB
J6
J4
J19
J4
J3
(Foil
side)
(Blue tape
side)
To SA, Opepane PCB
3-29
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
Note on installing the optional Parallel I/F Board:
1. On the back side of the printer, remove the 2 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “Plate, I/F
Cover”.
2. Align the bottom of the optional Parallel I/F Board with the rail of the printer as shown by the
arrow.
3. Slide the optional Parallel I/F Board along the rail and insert its connector into the I/F connector
(J201) of the “SA, Relay PCB”).
4. Fix the optional Parallel I/F Board to the printer with the 2 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) that were
used for the “Plate, I/F Cover”.
BH, M3x4 (NI)
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Connector
Plate, I/F Cover
I/F connector
(On the "SA, Relay PCB")
Parallel I/F Board
(Optional)
Rail
(A part of the "Case L")
Plate Main PCB
3-6-12. SA, Opepane PCB
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the “Case U”. Refer to “3-6-3(1) Removing the “Case U” Block”.
Remove the “Unit, Control Panel”. Refer to “3-6-11(1) Unit, Control Panel”.
Remove 3 screws (PHT (#2), M3x6) and detach the “SA, Opepane PCB”.
Remove the “Switch, CL-S” and “LED, Window” from the “Cover Ope-pane”.
LED, Window
Cover Ope-Pane
PHT (#2), M3x6
Switch, CL-S
SA, Opepane PCB
CL-S6621
3-30
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-13. “Unit, Mechanism”, “Unit, Power Supply” and “Case L”
(1) Unit, Mechanism
1. Remove the “Case U”. Refer to “3-6-3(1) Removing the “Case U” Block”.
2. Remove the cables from the “SA, Main PCB”. Refer to “3-6-11 “Unit, Control Panel”, “SA
PNE Sensor”, “SA, Relay PCB” and “SA, Main PCB””.
3. Remove the 3 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and 5 screws (PHT (PT2T), M3x14), and detach the
“Unit, Mechanism” upwardly.
BH, M3x4 (NI)
PHT (PT2T), M3x14
PHT (PT2T), M3x14
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Unit, Mechanism
Unit, Case L
Note on reassembling:
• When you once removed the “Unit Mechanism”, you need to adjust the paper path after
assembling the “Case U” Block.
For details, refer to “When once the “Unit, Mechanism” was removed (Paper path
adjustment): ” in “3-6-3(1) Removing the “Case U” Block”.
1
3-31
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
(2) Unit, Power Supply
1. Remove the 2 screws (FH, M3x6) (), and then 1 screw (BH, M4x5 (NI)) () and 1 washer
(Ext.T, 4 (NI)).
2. Disconnect the 1 connector and carefully pull out the “SA, Power SW Cable” () from the
“Plate Inlet”.
3. Remove the 2 screws (PHT (#2), M3x6) and remove the “Plate Inlet”. Then, remove the
“Label Inlet Volt (200-240)/(100-120)” from the “Plate Inlet”.
4. Turn over the “Case L” Block and remove the 2 screws (BH (N), M3x6 (NI)) () and detach
the “Case Power PCB”. Remove the “Leg Case L R” from the “Case Power PCB”.
5. Remove the 2 screws (BH (N), M3x6 (NI)) and detach the “Power PCB” Block from the
“Case L” Block.
• To disassemble the “SA, Power PCB”, go to the next step.
• To disasseble the “Case L”, go to the following “(3) Case L”.
BH, M4x5 (NI)
Label Inlet Volt (200-240)/(100-120)
PHT (#2), M3x6
FH, M3x6
SA, Power SW Cable
Plate Inlet
Ext.T, 4 (NI)
(Connector)
"Case L" Block
"Power PCB" Block
1-turn loop (the green earth wire)
BH (N), M3x6 (NI)
Case Power PCB
Leg Case L R
CL-S6621
BH (N), M3x6 (NI)
3-32
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
6. Remove the 1 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “Cover Power PCB” by sliding it to
the left and then lifting it.
7. Remove the 4 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)), and detach the “Unit, Power Supply” and the
“Spacer (fai3.5 7xL4mm)”.
8. Remove the “Sheet Insulation Power PCB” from the “Plate Power PCB”.
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Cover Power PCB
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Unit, Power Supply
Spacer (fai3.5 7xL4mm)
Sheet Insulation Power PCB
Plate Power PCB
Note on reassembling:
• When assembling the “SA, Power SW Cable”, run the wires as shown in the magnified view
on the previous page. Pass the wires through the hook and, for the green earth wire, make a
1-turn loop around the hook as shown.
3-33
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
(3) Case L
1. Lift the parts “a” and “b” of the “Plate Earth” a little to disengage them from the bosses “A”
and “B”.
2. Remove the “Plate Earth” upwardly.
3. Remove the 1 nut ((#3), M4) and “Leg Case L R” (3 pcs.) from the “Case L”.
Plate Earth
a
A’
C’
B’
D’
b
(#3), M4
A
Leg Case L R
C
D
Leg Case L R
B
Case L
Leg Case L R
Note on reassembling:
• When assembling the “Plate Earth” on the “Case L”, be sure that 4 holes (“A’ ”, “B’ ”, “C’ ”
and “”D’ ”) are securely engaged with the respective bosses (“A”, “B”, “C” and “”D”) of the
“Case L”.
CL-S6621
3-34
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-14. SA2 Platen
1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-6-13(1) Unit, Mechanism”.
2. Open the “SA, Head” Block.
3. While pressing the part “A” of the “SA2 Platen”, lift the right end of the “SA2 Platen” a little.
(See the arrow “a”.)
Next, move it to the right and then remove it from the printer by lifting it upwardly. (See the
arrow “b”.)
"SA, Head" block
SA2 Platen
a
b
A
Note on reassembling:
• After reassembling the “SA2 Platen”, be sure that it is securely engaged with the main body.
3-35
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-15. Unit, Sensor U
1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-6-13(1) Unit, Mechanism”.
2. Open the “Unit, Sensor U” to set it free. (See the arrow “a”.)
3. Remove 3 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “Unit, Sensor U” upwardly.
BH, M3x4 (NI)
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Unit, Sensor U
a
Notes on reassembling:
• Before assembling the “Unit, Sensor U”, run the “FFC, TRA Sensor” as follows.
[“FFC, TRA Sensor” wiring route]
Unit, Sensor U
FFC, TRA Sensor
Wiring route
(to be continued on the next page)
CL-S6621
3-36
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
• When assembling the “Unit, Sensor U”, follow the next steps.
1) Before assembling the “Unit, Sensor U”, turn the “Gear Bevel Lead Screw U” (blue knob) in
the direction “a” to move the “Holder Adjust Sensor U” to the left (“a’ ”). Turn it until the
“Holder Adjust Sensor U” hits the left end and stops.
2) Before assembling the “Unit, Sensor U”, turn the “Gear Bevel Joint Lead Screw” in the
direction “b” to move the “Holder Adjust Sensor L” to the left (“b’ ”). Turn it until the “Holder
Adjust Sensor L” hits the left end and stops.
3) Assemble the “Unit, Sensor U” with the 3 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)).
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Unit, Sensor U
BH, M3x4 (NI)
a’
Holder Adjust Sensor U
a
b
b’
Gear Bevel Lead Screw
(Blue)
Holder Adjust Sensor L
Gear Bevel Joint Lead Screw
4) Be sure that both indicators meet each other as shown below.
Holder Adjust Sensor U
Holder Adjust Sensor L
3-37
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-16. “SA TRA Sen PCB” and “Gear Bevel Lead Screw U”
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-6-13(1) Unit, Mechanism”.
Remove the “Unit, Sensor U”. Refer to “3-6-15 Unit, Sensor U”.
Remove the 1 screw (BHT (#2), M3x6 (NI)) and detach the “Knob Guide Paper U”.
Turn the “Gear Bevel Lead Screw U” (blue knob) in the direction as shown in the magnified
view to move the “Head Adjust Sensor U” to the right.
NOTE: Turn the “Gear Bevel Lead Screw U” (blue knob) until it stops.
Gear Bevel Lead Screw U (Blue Knob)
J9
Holder Adjust Sensor U
Cover Guide Paper U
Guide Paper U
Knob Guide Paper U
BHT (#2), M3x6 (NI)
5. Open the “Head Adjust Sensor U”.
Holder Adjust Sensor U
6. Remove the 1 screw (No.0, TFH (PT4-0.5), M2x4) from the “SA TRA Sen PCB”, and then
disconnect the “FFC TRA Sensor” from the “SA TRA Sen PCB”.
7. Remove the “FFC TRA Sensor” from the “Holder Adjust Sensor U”.
Holder Adjust Sensor U
SA TRA Sen PCB
No.0, TFH (PT4-0.5), M2x4
FFC, TRA Sensor
CL-S6621
3-38
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
8. Move the end “A” of the “Spring Guide Paper U” from “a” to “a’ “ to set the end free.
a’
a
A
A
9. Disengage the “E-Ring, 2.5” () and pull out the “Shaft Hinge Guide Paper U” (), and then
remove the ”Wave Washer 4x8xt0.15”, “Polyslider”, “Spring Guide Paper U”, “Spacer Hinge
Shaft” and “Gear Bevel Idle Sensor U”.
10. Remove the 5 screws (BHT (PT), M2x6) () and detach the “Cover Guide Paper U”.
11. Disengage the “E-Ring 3” (), remove the “Spacer, CR Shaft”, and pull out the “Shaft Lead
Screw” from the “Gear Bevel Lead Screw U” and “Guide Paper U” Block.
12. Remove the 3 nuts ((#3), M2) () with a nut driver and detach the “Pin Guide Paper U” (3
pcs.), and then remove the “Leaf Holder Adjust Sensor U” from the “Guide Paper U”.
E-Ring, 2.5
Guide Paper L
Shaft Hinge Guide Paper U
BHT (PT), M2x6
Wave Washer
4x8xt0.15
Cover Guide Paper U
BHT (PT), M2x6
Polyslider
Gear Bevel Idle
Sensor U
Spring Guide Paper U
Spacer Hinge Shaft
Gear Bevel Lead Screw U
Shaft Lead Screw
Spacer, CR Shaft
E-Ring 3
Nut, (#3), M2
FLOIL G-311S
Guide Paper U
Pin Guide Paper U
Leaf Holder Adjust Sensor U
3-39
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
Notes on reassembling:
• Apply FLOIL G-311S to the groove of the “Shaft Lead Screw” shown by the  mark.
• When assembling the “Spring Guide Paper U”,
follow the next steps.
1) First, hook the end “B” as shown below.
2) Next, insert the end “A” into the opening “a”
a
and move it from “a” to “a’ “ to hook it on
a’
the opening “a’ “ as shown below.
A
B
A
B
Spring Guide Paper U
• When assembling the “FFC, TRA Sensor”, run it as shown below.
FFC, TRA Sensor
Holder Adjust Sensor U
• When assembling the “Holder Adjust Sensor U”, assemble it so that its projection “A” is inserted
into the groove end “A’ ”of the “Shaft Lead Screw”. Also, securely engage the “Holder Adjust
Sensor U” with the “Guide Paper U” by aligning the projected parts “B” and “B’ ”.
Projection "A"
B
Holder Adjust Sensor U
Shaft Lead Screw
Groove end "A’ "
B’
Guide Paper U
• When the “SA TRA Sen PCB” is replaced with new one, perform the sensor adjustment. Refer to
“3-7-1 Transparent/Reflective Sensor Position Adjustment.
CL-S6621
3-40
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-17. Unit, Head
1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-6-13(1) Unit, Mechanism”.
2. Cut the “Wire Tie” (2 pcs.) () and remove the “SA, Ribbon Cable” ().
3. Open the “Unit, Head” and remove the 1 screw (PH (SW+PW), M4x16) (), then remove the
“Shaft Head Holder” () and “Spring Ribbon Unit Dumper” ().
4. Disengage the “E-ring 4” (), remove the “Bush Head Holder”, and detach the “Unit, Head”
() from the “Unit, PF”.
SA, Ribbon Cable
Wire Tie
Spring Ribbon
Unit Dumper
Unit, Head
Shaft Head Holder
FLOIL G-311S
C
J19
A
[When assembling]
F LOCTITE263
B
E Free end
FLOIL G-311S
D Spring end
Position here.
J5
Wire Tie
J3
PH (SW+PW), M4x16
J6
E-Ring 4
J7
J8
J11
Bush Head Holder
Unit, PF
Notes on reassembling:
• Apply FLOIL G-311S to the following places. (See the markÌ shown in the figure.)
A: Hole (front left). Circumference surface of the hole (on both sides) and inside the hole
B: Along the rack part.
C: 3 surfaces on the “Shaft Head Holder” ().
D and E: Both ends of the “Spring Ribbon Unit Dumper” ().
• Apply adhesive LOCTITE263 to the end (F) of screw (PH (SW+PW), M4x16) ().
• When assembling the “Shaft, Head Holder” (), be sure that its assembling direction is correct.
(See the magnified view.)
• Set the “Spring Ribbon Unit Dumper” ( as shown in the magnified view. Insert its rear end to
the opening “D”. Other end is a free end.
3-41
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-18. “SA, Head”, “Cam Head Balance” and “Cam Head Adjust”
Caution
• When detaching or reinstalling the "SA, Head", be careful not to damage the thermal
elements. Especially, avoid contacting the thermal elements with a metal part, etc.
Do not touch the thermal elements of the “SA, Head” with your bare hand.
(1) SA, Head
1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-6-13(1) Unit, Mechanism”.
2. Remove the “Unit, Head”. Refer to “3-6-17 Unit, Head“.
3. Place the “Unit, Head” upside down as shown in the figure.
4. Remove the 2 screws (NO.1, TFH (6-0.7), M3x6 (NI)) and lift the “SA, Head” Block. Then,
disconnect the “SA, Head Signal Cable” and “SA, Head Power Cable” from the “SA, Head”.
NOTE: To disconnect the “SA, Head Power Cable”, unlock the connector lock.
5. Remove the 2 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “Cover Head Cable”.
6. Cut the “Wire Tie” (2 pcs.) and remove the “SA, Head Signal Cable” and “SA, Head Power
Cable”.
7. Remove the “Sheet Head Connector P” from the “SA, Head Power Cable”.
J3
SA, Head Power Cable
NO.1, TFH (6-0.7), M3x6 (NI)
J5
SA, Head Signal Cable
SA, Head
Wire Tie
Sheet Head Connector P
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Cover Head Cable
CL-S6621
3-42
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
Notes on reassembling:
• After assembling the “SA, Head”, clean the surface of the thermal elements with the head
cleaner.
• After assembling the “SA, Head”, perform a test printing in self print mode to check the print
quality. (Refer to “2-3-2-(2-1) Self print mode”.) If the print quality is not enough, ribbon
slanting or ribbon wrinkle may occur. In this case, perform “3-7-2 Ribbon Slant Elimination
Adjustment”.
(2) Cam Head Balance
1. Place the Head Frame Block upside down and set the blue dials as follows for easier
disassembly.
Media width adjustment dial:
Location “5”
Media thickness adjustment dial: Location “5”
"5"
Cam Head Balance
(Media width adjustment dial)
"5"
Cam Head Adjust
(Media thickness adjustment dial)
3-43
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
2. Remove the 2 screws (PH, M3x10) ( and ) and 2 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) (). Then,
remove the “Plate Holder Head” Block () in the direction of arrow.
3. Remove the “Spring Head L”, “Spring Head R” (2 pcs.), “Plate Head Balance” and “Spacer
Head Balance”.
4. Remove the 1 screw (PH, M3x6) () and detach the “Pivot Head Balance Cam” and “Cam
Head Balance”.
5. Remove the 1 screw (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “Holder Guide Sensor U”.
6. Remove the 1 screw (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “Plate Ribbon Cable Stay”.
7. Remove the “”Support Pop Up” and peel off the labels (“Label 2, Caution Head (AH50)”,
“Label 6, Caution, Head/Label 7, Caution, Head/Label, Caution Head (China)” “Label, Head
Adjust” and “Label, Head Balance”) from the “SA Cover Frame”.
BH, M3x4 (NI)
PH, M3x10
"Plate Holder Head" Block
Spring Head L
Plate Head Balance
Label 2, Caution, Head (AH50)
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Label 6, Caution, Head/
Label 7, Caution, Head/
Label, Caution Head
Spring
Head R
Spacer Head Balance
PH, M3x6
Plate Ribbon
Cable Stay
Pivot Head Balance Cam
SA Cover Frame
Cam Head Balance
FLOIL G-311S
PH, M3x10
Holder Guide Sensor U
Support Pop Up
Label, Head Adjut
Label, Head Balance
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Notes on reassembling:
• Apply FLOIL G-311S to the following places. (See the markÌ shown in the figure.)
Pivot Head Balance Cam: Surface.
Cam Head Balance: Along the cam surface.
SA Cover Frame: The slit into which the claw of “Plate Head Balance” is inserted.
(to be continued on the next page)
CL-S6621
3-44
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
• When assembling the “Plate Holder Head” Block on the “SA Cover Frame” Block, follow the
next steps.
1) Insert the “Spring Head L” and “Spring Head R” on the “SA Cover Frame” Block. (See the
figure below.)
NOTE: The “Spring Head L” is shorter than the “Spring Head R”.
2) Align the “Plate Holder Head” Block so that the top ends of the “Spring Head L” and
“Spring Head R” are securely seated in the depressed parts “A” and “B”, respectively.
3) Gently press down the “Plate Holder Head” Block and then slide it in the direction of the
arrow so that the projections “C” of the “SA Cover Frame” Block are inserted in the slits
“C’ ”.
A
"Plate Holder Head" Block
C’
B
C’
Spring Head L
(Short one)
C
Spring Head R
(Long one)
C
"SA Cover Frame" Block
(3) Cam Head Adjust
1. In the “Plate Holder Head” Block, detach the “SA Head Adjust Lever” Block by pulling it out
from the “Plate Holder Head” Block. (They are simply connected with the “Spring Head
Holder”.)
"Plate Holder Head" Block
Spring Head Holder
"SA Head Adjust Lever" Block
3-45
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
2. Remove the “Spring Head Holder” () from the “SA Head Adjust Lever” Block.
3. In the “SA Head Adjust Lever” Block, disengage the 3 E-rings (E-Ring 3) () to detach the
“SA Head Adjust Lever” from the “Base Head Adjust” Block.
4. Remove the 1 screw (PHT (#2), M2x6) (), and detach the 1 washer (Plain, 2.6x6.5x0.5)
and “Spring, Adjust Cam”. Next, pull out the “Bush Head Adjust” from the “Guide, Head
Adjust (Spring)” and detach the “Guide, Head Adjust (Spring)” and “Cam Head Adjust” from
the “Base Head Adjust”.
5. Pull out the “Bushing Head” (2 pcs.), and then remove the 1 screw (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and
detach the “Plate Head Earth” from the “Plate Holder Head”.
Base Head Adjust
E-Ring 3
SA Head Adjust Lever
Spring Head Holder
PHT (#2), M2x6
Plain, 2.6x6.5x0.5
Spring, Adjust Cam
Bushing Head
Bush Head Adjust
Plate Holder Head
Cam Head Adjust
Guide, Head Adjust (Spring)
(On the pposite side)
FLOIL G-311S
a
Plate Head Earth
Bushing Head
b
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Notes on reassembling:
• Apply FLOIL G-311S to the following places. (See the markÌ shown in the figure.)
Plate Holder Head: Surface where the “Spring Head Holder” () contacts and its opposite
side.
Base Head Adjust: Holes (5 pcs.) and 1 groove.
• When assembling the “Spring Head Holder”:
Assemble the “Spring Head Holder” (“D”) on the “SA Head Adjust Lever” Block as shown in
the magnified view. Then, insert them into the “Plate Holder Head” Block as shown.
"Plate Holder Head" Block
Spring Head Holder
"Plate Holder Head" Block
D
"SA Head Adjust Lever" Block
CL-S6621
3-46
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-19. SA PF Motor
1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-6-13(1) Unit, Mechanism”.
2. Cut the “Wire Tie”. Then remove 2 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “SA PF Motor”
Block.
3. Disconnect the “SA, PF Motor Cable” from the “SA PF Motor”.
BH, M3x4 (NI)
J6
J7
Wire Tie
SA, PF Motor Cable
SA PF Motor
3-6-20. “Carriage Adjust Sensor L”, “SA, Head Up Switch” and “SA Ref
Sen PCB”
(1) “Carriage Adjust Sensor L” and “SA, Head Up Switch”
1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-6-13(1) Unit, Mechanism”.
2. Remove the “Unit, Sensor U”. Refer to “3-6-15 Unit, Sensor U”.
3. Remove the “Unit, Head”. Refer to “3-6-17 Unit, Head”.
4. Remove the “SA, PF Motor”. ”Refer to “3-6-19 SA PF Motor”.
5. Turn over the PF Block.
6. Cut the “Wire Tie” (2 pcs.) and unhook the wires from the 2 hooks.
"PF" Block
Hook
Wire Tie
Hook
Carriage Adjust Sensor L
SA, Head Up Switch
Wire Tie
[Bottom View]
3-47
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
7. Remove the “Carriage Adjust Sensor L” and other related parts.
1) Remove the 1 screw (BH, M3x4 (NI)) (), and detach the “Cover Sensor Cable L”.
2) Remove the 2 screws (BHT (PT), M2x6) () and detach the “Carriage Adjust Sensor
L”.
3) Remove the “Pinion Sensor L” and “Leaf Pinion Sensor L” from the “Carriage Adjust
Sensor L”.
4) Disengage the “E-Ring 3” (), remove the “Wave Washer 4x8xt0.15” and “Spacer, CR
Shaft”, and then detach the “Shaft Lead Screw”.
5) Remove the 1 screw (BH, M3x4 (NI)) () and detach the “Holder Screw L” and “Gear
Lead Screw L”.
6) Remove the “Sheet Blind” from the frame.
8. Remove the “SA, Head Up Switch”.
1) Remove the 1 screw (BH, M3x4 (NI)) () and detach the “Guide Cover Frame Pop Up”
Block. Then, remove the “Spring Pop Up” and “Pop Up Cover Frame” from the “Guide
Cover Frame Pop Up”.
2) Remove the 1 screw (No.0, PHT (BT #3), M1.7x7) () and detach the “SA, Head Up
Switch”.
a
Wire Tie
b
ac
d
a
Wire Tie
Sheet Blind
c b
FLOIL G-311S
Gear Lead Screw L
Holder Screw L
Shaft Lead Screw
Spacer, CR Shaft
Wave Washer
4x8xt0.15
E-Ring 3
Carriage Adjust Sensor L
BHT (PT), M2x6
d
BH, M3x4 (NI)
No.0, PHT (BT #3), M1.7x7
SA, Head Up Switch
Cover Sensor Cable L
BH, M3x4 (NI)
CL-S6621
3-48
Guide Cover
Frame Pop Up
Pop Up Cover Frame
Pinion Sensor L
Leaf Pinion Sensor L
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Spring Pop Up
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
Notes on reassembling:
• When assembling the “Leaf Pinion Sensor L” and “Pinion Sensor L” on the “Carriage Adjust
Sensor L”:
1) First, place the “Leaf Pinion Sensor L” inside the “Carriage Adjust Sensor L” with the
convex side facing up.
2) Next, place the “Pinion Sensor L” inside the “Carriage Adjust Sensor L”. Pat attention to
its installing direction.
3) Insert the projection “A” into the groove “A’ “of the “Shaft Lead Screw”.
4) Apply FLOIL G-311S to the “Leaf Pinion Sensor L”. (See the markÌ shown below.)
A’
Shaft Lead Screw
Pinion Sensor L
Leaf Pinion Sensor L
FLOIL G-311S
Carriage Adjust Sensor L
A
• Apply FLOIL G-311S to the groove of “Shaft Lead Screw”.
• After assembling each part, arrange the wires as follows.
1) Turn the “Gear Lead Screw L” in the direction shown by the arrow to move the “Carriage
Adjust Sensor L” to the right until it stops.
2) In this condition, run the 5 wires from the “SA Ref Sen PCB” on the top side as shown
below. Hook them on the hooks.
3) Run the 2 wires from the “SA, Head Up Switch” as shown below. Hook them on the right
side hook.
4) Bind the wires with “Wire Tie” at two places.
Gear Lead Screw L
Wire Tie
5 wires from the "SA Ref Sen PCB" on the top side.
Wire Tie
Hook
Hook
Carriage Adjust Sensor L
SA, Head Up Switch
[Bottom View]
3-49
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
(2) SA Ref Sen PCB
1. Remove the “Carriage Adjust Sensor L”. Perform steps 1 to 7)-2 in above “3-6-20(1)
“Carriage Adjust Sensor L” and “SA, Head Up Switch””.
2. Disengage the “E-Ring, 1.5” (), remove 1 screw (BH, M3x4 (NI)) (), and detach the
“Holder, Guide Sensor L”.
3. Slide the “Guide Paper R” () to the left and remove the “Shaft Sensor Guide” () in the
direction shown by the arrow, together with the “Guide Paper R” Block and “Holder Adjust
Sensor L” Block.
4. Remove the “Spacer Guide Shaft”, and then pull out the “Guide Paper R” Block and “Holder
Adjust Sensor L” Block from the “Shaft Sensor Guide”.
5. Remove the “Spring Friction Sen PG” and the “Plate Friction PG” from the “Guide Paper R”.
6. Disconnect the “SA, Ref Sensor Cable” from the “SA Ref Sen PCB”.
7. Remove the 2 screws (No.0 PHT (BT#1) M2x3) and detach the “SA Ref Sen PCB” from the
“Holder Adjust Sensor L”.
[Bottom View]
SA Ref Sen PCB
No.0 PHT (BT#1) M2x3
SA, Ref Sensor Cable
Holder Adjust Sensor L
a
No.0 PHT (BT#1) M2x3
Guide Paper R
7
E-ring, 1.5
b
ac
d
No.0 PHT (BT#1) M2x3
a
Spring Friction
Sen PG
9
Plate Function PG
10
Shaft Sensor Guide
Spacer Guide Shaft
c b
B
A
8
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Holder, Guide Sensor L
Notes on reassembling:
• When the “SA Ref Sen PCB” is replaced with new one, perform the sensor adjustment.
Refer to “3-7-1 Transparent/Reflective Sensor Position Adjustment”.
• Assemble the “Shaft Sensor Guide” () (with the “Holder Adjust Sensor L” Block, “Guide,
Paper R” Block and the “Spacer Guide Shaft”), and align its ends in places. Next, assemble
the “Holder, Guide Sensor L”. (Its groove “A” should engage with the frame plate. Also its
protrusions should be inserted into the holes “B” in the frame.)
(to be continued on the next page)
CL-S6621
3-50
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
Spacer Guide Shaft
• After assembling the “Holder, Guide
Sensor L”, push the “Spacer Guide
Shaft” toward the right side frame as
shown on the right.
• After assembling each part, arrange the
wires. (Refer to the “Notes on
reassembling” in above “3-6-20(1)
“Carriage Adjust Sensor L” and “SA, Head
Up Switch””.)
Holder, Guide Sensor L
3-6-21. Gears
1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-6-13(1) Unit, Mechanism”.
2. Remove the 1 screw (PH (PW), M2x8), and detach the “Support PF Idle Gear”.
3. Remove the “Washer, Platen” and pull out the “Gear Reduction PF2. Then, pull out the “Gear
Reduction PF1” and “Gear Idle PF”.
4. Remove the 2 screws (PH, M3x6) and remove the “Hinge One Way” Block.
5. Disengage the “E-Ring 4” and remove the “Gear One Way Hinge” and “Shaft One Way Hinge”
from the “Hinge One Way”.
PH (PW), M2x8
Support PF Idle Gear
Washer, Platen
Gear Reduction PF 2
FLOIL G-311S
Gear Idle PF
c
b
c
Gear Reduction PF 1
a
b
a
Gear One Way Hinge
Shaft One Way Hinge
Hinge One Way
E-Ring 4
PH, M3x6
D-cut
[When assembling]
Note on reassembling:
• Apply FLOIL G-311S to each gear shaft (3 shafts) and to each gear surface. (See the markÌ
shown in the figure.)
3-51
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-22. “Lever Head Lock” and “SA Main Frame R”
1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-6-13(1) Unit, Mechanism”.
2. Remove the “SA, PF Motor”. ”Refer to “3-6-19 SA PF Motor”.
3. Remove the “Carriage Adjust Sensor L” and “SA, Head Up Switch”. Refer to “3-6-20(1)
“Carriage Adjust Sensor L” and “SA, Head Up Switch””.
4. Remove the 4 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “SA Main Frame R” Block.
5. Disengage the “E-Ring, 2.5”, and remove the “Lever Head Lock” and “Spring Head Lock” from
the “SA Main Frame R”.
SA Main Frame R
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Lever Head Lock
Spring Head Lock
E-Ring, 2.5
Note on reassembling:
• When assembling the “Lever Head Lock”, hook the “Spring Head Lock” as shown below. (Shorter
end is inserted into the groove of the “Lever Head Lock” and the longer end into the frame hole.)
Lever Head Lock
Spring Head Lock
CL-S6621
3-52
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-23. “Frame Main”, “SA Main Frame L” and “Plate Peel Guide”
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-6-13(1) Unit, Mechanism”.
Remove the “Unit, Sensor U”. Refer to “3-6-15 Unit, Sensor U”.
Remove the “Unit, Head”. Refer to “3-6-17 Unit, Head”.
Remove the “SA, PF Motor”. ”Refer to “3-6-19 SA PF Motor”.
Remove the “Carriage Adjust Sensor L” “SA, Head Up Switch” and “SA Ref Sen PCB”. Refer to
“3-6-20 “Carriage Adjust Sensor L”, “SA, Head Up Switch” and “SA Ref Sen PCB””.
Remove the gears. Refer to “3-6-21 Gears”.
Remove the “SA Main Frame R”. Refer to “3-6-22 “Lever Head Lock” and “SA Main Frame R””.
Remove the 3 screws (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and detach the “Frame Main”.
Pull out the “Gear Bevel Joint Lead Screw”.
Remove the 1 screw (BH, M3x4 (NI)) and remove the “Plate Peel Guide” Block from the “SA2
Main Frame L”.
Peel off the “Label Edge Mark” from the “Plate Peel Guide”.
BH, M3x4 (NI)
SA2 Main Frame L
FLOIL G-311S
Gear Bevel Joint Lead Screw
Frame Main
Label Edge Mark
BH, M3x4 (NI)
Plate Peel Guide
Notes on reassembling:
• Apply FLOIL G-311S to the gear shaft. (See the markÌ shown in the figure.)
• Stick the “Label Edge Mark” as shown on the right.
Label Edge Mark
Pay attention to the direction of the Mark. Then, align
the right edge of the “Label Edge Mark” with the slit
Mark
“A” and stick the “Label Edge Mark” onto the “Plate
Peel Guide” so that it covers in the slit “A”.
Plate Peel Guide
Another slit
Slit "A"
3-53
CL-S6621
Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication
3-6-24. Disassembling the “Roll Paper Shaft”
1. Remove the 2 screws (BHT (#2), M3x6 (NI)) and detach the “Shaft Paper”.
2. Remove the “Slider PNE”, “Lever PNE” and “Spring PNE” from the “Cover Shaft Paper”.
NOTE: To remove the “Lever PNE”, pull it out from the “Slider PNE”.
Cover Shaft Paper
Spring PNE
Lever PNE
Slider PNE
BHT (#2), M3x6 (NI)
Shaft Paper
Notes on reassembling:
• Apply FLOIL G-311S to the convex parts (2 places) of the “Lever PNE. (See the markÌ shown in
the figure.)
• Insert the “Lever PNE” into the “Slider PNE” as shown below.
• Insert the end of the “Spring PNE” (“A”) into “A’ ” of the “Slider PNE”. Also, insert the projection
“B” into the slit “B’ “ as shown below.
[When assembling]
Spring PNE
A
Slider PNE
A’
B’
B
Cover Shaft Paper
[Lubrication]
[When assembling]
Slider PNE
Slider PNE
Lever PNE
FLOIL G-311S
CL-S6621
3-54
Adjustments
3-7.
Adjustments
3-7-1. Transparent/Reflective Sensor Position Adjustment
When you replace one of the following parts, perform both sensor position adjustment and sensor
sensitivity adjustment.
• SA, Main PCB
• SA TRA Sen PCB
• SA Ref Sen PCB
(1) Sensor position adjustment (factory mode)
After entering Factory mode, adjust the following submenu items:
• Through Sensor Position
• Reflect Sensor Position
For details, refer to “2-3-2-(3-3)-(a) Factory mode menu table”.
(2) Sensor sensitivity adjustment (maintenance mode)
In this adjustment, since the printer has not a display, PC is used instead.
All operations will be done with the keys on the printer’s control panel.
Communication between the printer and a PC is made through the serial port.
(2-1) Preparation
Before starting adjustment, prepare the following items:
• Media (both label paper and tag) (recommended media or media you use)
• RS-232C serial cable
• PC which is installed Terminal software such as HyperTerminal and TeraTerm.
Windows normally comes with the HyperTerminal. If the software is not installed, you
need to install it.
* Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Setting on the PC side:
Make the following settings on the PC beforehand:
1. Connect the RS-232C serial cable between the printer and the PC.
2. On the PC, start the Terminal software.
3 Set the transmission conditions on the Terminal software so that they are identical to
those on the printer side.
Default values of the printer:
• Transmission speed (baud rate): 9,600 bps
• Data length:
8 bits
• Stop bit:
1 bit
• Protocol:
XON/XOFF
3-55
CL-S6621
Adjustments
Key operation on the printer:
PAUSE
FEED
STOP
UP
(Next item / Increase item)
SELECT
DOWN
(Previous item / Decrease item)
MODE/REPEAT
EXIT
(2-2) Adjustment procedures
Caution
• DO NOT adjust for other menus not explained here. They are for factory setup
use and changing them will cause the printer to be defective.
• Do not turn OFF the power of the printer until you finish the adjustment.
If it is turned OFF, you need to repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
• The value adjusted here is retained until you change it with the same
procedure. Even if you perform initialization in the “user menu setup
mode”, it is not initialized.
1. Turn on the PC and run the Terminal software.
2. While pressing and holding the [MODE], [FEED] and [STOP] key, turn on the power.
([MODE] + [FEED] + [STOP] + [POWER])
3. The following initial maintenance screen will appear on the PC.
[Transparent sensor sensitivity adjustment, Media: Label paper]
4. Press the [FEED] key to select the transparent sensor menu (“Ini Thru Sensor”).
CL-S6621
3-56
Adjustments
5. Peel off the label from liner (base) and set the liner part to the printer. Be sure that the
normal adjustments for printing are correctly made.
• Media sensor menu: “See Through”
• Sensor positioning for the liner
6. Press the [FEED] key to enter the transparent sensor adjustment mode.
7. Press the [PAUSE] key to move the cursor to “Exec.”.
8. Press the [FEED] key to perform adjustment.
Liner is automatically fed little by little and adjustment is performed.
During adjustment, the following screen appears.
When adjustment is successful, “Finished DAC XXX” is displayed.
*The value “143” is one of samples.
3-57
CL-S6621
Adjustments
9. Press any key on the control panel to store the adjusted value.
Proceed to step 10 to perform reflective sensor adjustment.
[When adjustment failed]
When adjustment failed, “Cannot Setup” is displayed.
1) Press any key on the control panel to return to the screen in step 4.
2) Check the mechanical sensor positions, current Media sensor menu setting, label
paper, etc. and try again.
[Reflective sensor sensitivity adjustment, Media: Tag]
10. Press the [PAUSE] key to select the reflective sensor menu.
“Ini Refl Sensor” screen will appear.
[PAUSE] key
11. Press the [FEED] key to enter the reflective sensor menu.
12. Set tag with black marks, but avoid placing the black
mark part on the reflective sensor.
If you use continuous tag, set it to the printer.
Be sure that the normal adjustments for printing are
correctly made.
• Media sensor menu: “Reflect”/”None” (for continuous
paper)
• Sensor positioning:
The bottom sensor should meet the black mark position.
(However, avoid putting the black mark on the sensor.)
CL-S6621
3-58
Black mark
Adjustments
13. Press the [PAUSE] key to move the cursor to “Exec.”.
14. Press the [FEED] key to perform adjustment.
Tag is automatically fed little by little and adjustment is performed.
During adjustment, “Now!! Executing” appears.
When adjustment is successful, “Finished DAC XXX” is displayed.
*The value “168” is one of samples.
15. Press any key on the control panel to store the adjusted value.
Then, the screen returns to the one in step 10 and “Ini Refl Sensor” is displayed.
16. Turn OFF the power to terminate the adjustment.
3-59
CL-S6621
Adjustments
3-7-2. Ribbon Slant Elimination Adjustment
NOTE: The general procedure how to remove ribbon wrinkles is explained in “Removing Ribbon
Wrinkles” on page 3-62.
2
(1) Ribbon slant elimination adjustment
As you turn the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Front), the knob side (right side)
of the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” moves back and forth with the eccentric mechanism. In the
same way, when you turn the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Rear), the knob
side (right side) of the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R” moves up and down. With this eccentric
mechanism, ribbon running can be adjusted.
TIP: The adjustment on the front side is more effective than that on the rear side.
Ribbon
Ribbon Left-Right Balance
Adjustment Knob (Rear)
[Front]
SA, Ribbon Sensor Frame F
SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R
Ribbon Left-Right Balance
Adjustment Knob (Front)
CL-S6621
3-60
Adjustments
(1-1) Ribbon slant elimination adjustment (FRONT)
This front side adjustment is required in the following cases:
• Ribbon slant occurs, resulting in ribbon wrinkle.
• “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F” is replaced or reassembled.
1. Turn the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knobs (Front) to the center of the scale.
2. Turn the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Rear) to the center of the scale.
Ribbon Left-Right Balance
Adjustment Knob (Front)
Ribbon
Ribbon Left-Right Balance
Adjustment Knob (Rear)
3. Turn the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Front) to remove ribbon wrinkle.
4. If ribbon slant is not removed yet, proceed to the next item, (1-2).
(1-2) Ribbon slant elimination adjustment (REAR)
This rear side adjustment is required in the following cases:
• Ribbon slant occurs, resulting in ribbon wrinkle.
• “Unit, Ribbon Sensor R” is replaced or reassembled.
1. Turn the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Rear) and remove ribbon
wrinkle.
2. If ribbon slant is not removed, repeat from the above item, (1-1).
3-61
CL-S6621
Adjustments
Removing Ribbon Wrinkles
The following explains the general procedure for removing ribbon wrinkles.
Adjusting points:
• Ribbon tension
• Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Front) - Ribbon slant
• Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Rear) - Ribbon slant
• “Shaft, Ribbon Guide” (a part of the “SA, Head”) - Ribbon slant
How to check ribbon wrinkles:
• Visual check
Adjustment procedure:
First, adjust the ribbon tension and then the ribbon paths (front/rear) to remove ribbon wrinkles.
(1) Ribbon slant elimination adjustment
Ribbon is fed from the supply side and taken up on the take-up side via the “SA, Ribbon
Tension Shaft R” and the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F”. (See the figure on the next page.)
1. Adjust the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Front) and then the Ribbon
Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Rear) to remove ribbon wrinkle.
Refer to “3-7-2(1) Ribbon slant elimination adjustment”.
(2-1) Visual check and adjustment
Checking the ribbon surface visually is a good way to see whether the ribbon wrinkles or
not. You can find wrinkles by the reflected light on the ribbon surface. Check both take-up
side and supply sides of ribbon. (See the figure on the next page to find the places where
wrinkles may appear.)
NOTE: For removing wrinkles, front side adjustment is more effective than the rear side
one.
1. Perform test print in self print mode. (Refer to “2-3-2-(2-1) Self print mode”.)
2. Visually check the take-up side for ribbon wrinkles.
Since ribbon is taken up stronger on the shorter ribbon path side, wrinkles appear on
the longer path side. During printing the self print patterns, check wrinkles and correct
the ribbon travel as follows:
• If wrinkles are found on the left side (“a” in the figure), turn the Ribbon Left-Right
Balance Adjustment Knob (Front) clockwise.
• If wrinkles are found on the right side (“a’ “ in the figure), turn the knob
counterclockwise.
• If wrinkles are found at around center, find the side (either front or rear) and turn the
knob accordingly.
3. Visually check on the supply side for ribbon wrinkles.
Since ribbon is pulled stronger on the shorter ribbon path side, wrinkles appear on the
longer path side.
During printing the self print patterns, check wrinkles and correct ribbon travel as
follow:
• If wrinkles are found on the left side (“b” in the figure), turn the Ribbon Left-Right
Balance Adjustment Knob (Rear) counterclockwise.
CL-S6621
3-62
Adjustments
• If wrinkles are found on the right side (“b’ “ in the figure), turn the knob clockwise.
• If wrinkles are found at around center, find the side (either front or rear) and turn the
knob accordingly.
4. Be sure that the adjusted positions in Steps 2 and 3 are at around the center of the
scales, respectively.
b
a
b’
Ribbon
a’
B’
[Front]
B
A’
A’
A
B
A
Ribbon Left-Right Balance
Adjustment Knob (Front)
B’
Ribbon Left-Right Balance
Adjustment Knob (Rear)
SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R
SA, Ribbon Sensor Frame F
3-63
CL-S6621
CHAPTER 4
TROUBLESHOOTING
4-1
CL-S6621
CHAPTER 4
TROUBLESHOOTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4-1. Error Message and Corrective Actions ........................................................................... 4-3
4-2. Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 4-5
4-2-1. Problems in Powering Up the Printer ................................................................. 4-5
4-2-2. Media-feed Problems ......................................................................................... 4-6
4-2-3. Problems in Printing ........................................................................................... 4-7
4-2-4. Ribbon-feed Problem ......................................................................................... 4-8
4-2-5. Sensor Problems................................................................................................ 4-10
4-2-6. Operation Panel Problems ................................................................................. 4-12
4-2-7. Connector Location ............................................................................................ 4-13
CL-S6621
4-2
Error Message and Corrective Actions
4-1.
Error Message and Corrective Actions
When an error occurs, the error condition will be displayed on the operation panel. The LEDs on
the control panel blink to tell you the error contents.
In case of error (except for abnormal head/motor temperature), the printer enters off line and the
PRINT LED goes out.
Causes/Corrective Actions
Head open
• Close the head.
Media end
• Add media.
Media out (Media not detected)
• Incorrect sensor positioning:
PRINT LED
CONDITION LED
ERROR LED
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Correct the sensor position to
match the sensor position with
the label/tag’s black mark.
• Incorrect Media mode menu:
Match the Media mode menu
(e.g. SeeThrough) and media to
be used.
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
• Incorrect sensor adjustment
against media to be used:
Enter sensor adjustment mode
([PAUSE]+[FEED]+[STOP]+
[POWER]), and perform sensor
adjustment.
Abnormal ribbon feed
Ribbon out (Ribbon end)
Abnormal temperature raise of “SA,
Head”
• Printing will temporarily stop.
Wait until the “SA, Head” gets
cool.
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
4-3
OFF
CL-S6621
Error Message and Corrective Actions
Causes/Corrective Actions
Abnormal temperature raise of “SA
PF Motor” or “SA Ribbon Motor F”
• Printing will temporarily stop.
Wait until the motor gets cool.
Abnormal temperature raise of auto
cutter (Optional)
• Printing will temporarily stop.
Wait until the auto cutter gets
cool.
Abnormal head resistance
• Due to defective thermal
element:
Printing quality will degrade.
Communication error
• Reception buffer overrun
• Parity or framing error
• Transmission buffer overflow
System error
• Overheat of “SA PF Motor”, “SA
Ribbon Motor F”, “SA, Head” or
the cutter motor (option)
• Overcurrent of “SA PF Motor”
Auto cutter abnormality (Optional)
• Jamming, etc.
Paper near end
* By default, issuing a paper near
end alarm is disabled. To enable
it, change the Paper Near End
Alarm submenu under the
“PageSetup” main menu from
Off to On.
CL-S6621
PRINT LED
CONDITION LED
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ERROR LED
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
4-4
ON
Troubleshooting
4-2.
Troubleshooting
The following tables show possible remedies for various symptoms that might occur. Symptoms
are given in the left column, and the corresponding remedies in the right column.
Notes: 1. When parts are replaced, refer to Chapter 3 "Disassembly and Maintenance".
2. Connectors (J . . .) given in the column of checks and remedies are connected with the
“SA, Main PCB”. For the location of each connector, refer to “4-2-7 Connector
Location".
4-2-1. Problems in Powering Up the Printer
Symptoms
No power to the
printer
Checks
Remedies
1. Check voltage on the input power line.
Acceptable supply voltage:
85V to 132V AC for 120V version
185V to 264V AC for 220V version
1. Supply correct voltage.
2. Is the connector of “SA, Power SW
Cable” firmly connected to the “Unit,
Power Supply”?
2. Connect it firmly.
3. Is the “SA, Power Cable” firmly
connected between the “Unit, Power
Supply” and the “SA, Main PCB” (J15)?
3. Connect it firmly.
4. Is +24V supplied to the pins 1-4 of J15 4. If no DC voltage is supplied,
on the “SA, Main PCB”? (GND: Pins
replace the “Unit, Power Supply”.
5-8)
NOTE:
If the “Unit, Power Supply” is NOT
connected to the “SA, Main PCB”,
the output will be +9V. This is not a
trouble. If both PCBs are
connected, +24V will be correctly
output.
[Bottom right of the “SA, Main PCB”]
5. Is the “Cable, Opepane” connected
between the “SA, Main PCB” (J4) and
the “SA, Opepane PCB” firmly?
If it is not connect or is inserted upside
down, no LED lights even if you turned
ON the power.
5. Connect it firmly.
6. Failure in the power supply circuit.
6. Replace the “Unit, Power Supply”.
7. Failure in the control circuit.
7. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.
4-5
CL-S6621
Troubleshooting
4-2-2. Media-feed Problems
Symptoms
No media feed
Checks
Remedies
1. Are the connectors J6 and J7 (for “SA
PF Motor”) connected firmly?
1. Connect them firmly.
2. Is the connector J15 (for “Unit, Power
Supply”) connected firmly?
2. Connect it firmly.
3. Is +24V supplied to the pins 1-4 of J15
on the “SA, Main PCB”? (GND: Pins
5-8)
3. Replace the “Unit, Power Supply”.
[Bottom right of the “SA, Main PCB”]
Irregular media feed
pitch
Media jamming
CL-S6621
4. Failure in the control circuit or in the
paper feed motor driver.
4. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.
5. Does the “SA PF Motor” work?
5. Replace the “SA PF Motor”.
1. Are the connectors J6 and J7 (for “SA
PF Motor”) connected firmly?
1. Connect them firmly.
2. Is dust or other foreign matter on the
“SA2_Platen”?
2. Remove dust or foreign matter.
3. Does the media feed mechanism work
smoothly?
3. Check, clean and lubricate
mechanical parts.
Note: Refer to Chap. 3
"Disassembly and Maintenance".
4. Failure in the control circuit or in the
paper feed motor driver.
4. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.
1. Is media set correctly?
1. Set media correctly.
2. Is the media being used within
manufacturer's specifications?
2. Use media within manufacturer's
specifications.
3. Check the media feed mechanism and
media path for dust or other foreign
matter.
3. Remove dust or foreign matter.
4-6
Troubleshooting
4-2-3. Problems in Printing
Symptoms
No print
Checks
Remedies
1. Is the head block securely closed?
1. Close the head block correctly.
2. Is the “SA, Head” over heated?
In this case, PRINT LED and
CONDITION LED simultaneously blink.
2. Wait until the “SA, Head” gets cool.
Printing will resume automatically.
3. Is the “SA PF Motor” over heated?
In this case, PRINT LED and
CONDITION LED blink alternatively.
3. Wait until the “SA PF Motor” gets
cool.
Printing will resume automatically.
4. Is “SA Ribbon Motor F” over heated?
In this case, PRINT LED and
CONDITION LED blink alternatively.
4. Wait until the “SA Ribbon Motor F”
gets cool. Printing will resume
automatically.
5. Is the interface cable firmly connected
between the printer and the host?
5. Connect it firmly.
6. Are the “SA, Head Signal Cable” and
“SA, Head Power Cable” connected
between the “SA, Head” and the “SA,
Main PCB” (J3 and J5)?
6. Connect them firmly.
7. Does the transparent/reflective sensor
detect presence of media?
7. To check, see “Sensor Problems".
8. Is +24V supplied to the pins 1-4 of J15
on the “SA, Main PCB”? (GND: Pins
5-8)
8. Replace the “Unit, Power Supply”.
[Bottom right of the “SA, Main PCB”]
9. “SA, Head” is broken.
9. Replace the “SA, Head”.
10. Failure in the head driver circuit.
10. Replace the “SA, Head”.
11. Failure in the control circuit.
11. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.
12. For thermal transfer printing:
Is ribbon set correctly?
12. Set the ribbon correctly. (Be sure
that the inked surface faces the
media.)
13. For thermal printing:
Is thermal paper used?
13. Use thermal paper.
4-7
CL-S6621
Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Poor printing
Checks
Remedies
1. The “SA, Head” is dirty.
1. Clean it with a head cleaner.
2. Thickness adjustment is improper.
2. Adjust the media thickness
adjustment dial to suit to the media
thickness being used.
3. Is +24V supplied to the pins 1-4 of J15
on the “SA, Main PCB”? (GND: Pins
5-8)
3. Replace the “Unit, Power Supply”.
[Bottom right of the “SA, Main PCB”]
Uneven print density
1. Head balance is improper.
Uneven print density may appear either
on the right side or the left side.
1. Adjust the media width adjustment
dial to suit to the media width
being used.
4-2-4. Ribbon-feed Problem
Symptoms
Ribbon is not fed at
all, or is not fed
correctly.
Checks
Remedies
1. Is the ribbon correctly inserted into the
ribbon holders?
1. Insert the ribbon correctly.
2. Is the ribbon path correct?
2. Install the ribbon correctly.
3. Is the cable connected between J19 on
the “SA, Main PCB” and J102 on the
“SA, Ribbon PCB” firmly?
3. Connect it firmly.
4. Are the cables connected between
J101/J107 on the “SA, Ribbon PCB”
and the “SA Ribbon Motor F” firmly?
4. Connect them firmly.
5. Is the cable connected between J103 on 5. Connect it firmly.
the “SA, Ribbon PCB” and the “SA
Ribbon Motor R” firmly?
(to be continued)
CL-S6621
4-8
Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Ribbon is not fed at
all, or is not fed
correctly.
Checks
Remedies
6. Does the ribbon cooling fan work
correctly for cooling the ribbon motors?
If not, check if the cable of the “SA,
Fan” is firmly connected to the “SA,
Ribbon PCB” (J106).
Note:
The fan does not turn all the time. It
turns when the temperature of the “SA
Ribbon Motor F” on the front side
exceeds a certain value.
6. Connect the cable firmly.
7. Do the ribbon sensors on the front and
rear sides work correctly?
See “4-2-5 Sensor Problems”.
7. Replace the “SA, Ribbon Sensor”
on the front/rear side.
8. Do the ribbon drive gears work
correctly?
8. Replace a defective ribbon gear.
9. Does the “SA Ribbon Motor F”/“SA
Ribbon Motor R” work correctly?
9. Replace the “SA Ribbon Motor F”/
“SA Ribbon Motor R”.
10. Failure in the ribbon motor drive circuit. 10. Replace the “SA, Ribbon PCB”.
Ribbon slants.
11. Failure in the ribbon motor control
circuit.
11. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.
1. Is the ribbon correctly inserted into the
ribbon holders?
1. Insert the ribbon correctly.
2. Is the ribbon path correct?
2. Install the ribbon correctly.
3. Is the ribbon slant elimination
adjustment made?
3. Adjust it according to “3-7-2 Ribbon
Slant Elimination Adjustment”.
4-9
CL-S6621
Troubleshooting
4-2-5. Sensor Problems
Symptoms
Head block is closed,
but head open error
is indicated by LEDs.
(Head up switch
problem)
Ribbon tension is not
correctly controlled.
(Front/rear side of
“SA, Ribbon Sensor”
problem)
Ribbon end is not
correctly detected.
(Rear side of “SA,
Ribbon Sensor”
problem)
CL-S6621
Checks
Remedies
1. Is the connector of “SA, Head Up
Switch” firmly connected to the “SA,
Main PCB” (J11)?
1. Connect it firmly.
2. Does the head up switch activating
mechanism push the switch lever and
the switch turn ON properly?
2. Replace the “SA, Head Up
Switch”.
3. Failure in the control circuit.
3. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.
1. Is the connector of “SA, Ribbon Sensor” 1. Connect it firmly.
on the front side firmly connected to the
“SA, Ribbon PCB” (J104)?
2. Is the connector of “SA, Ribbon Sensor” 2. Connect it firmly.
on the rear side firmly connected to the
“SA, Ribbon PCB” (J105)?
3. Does the “SA, Ribbon Sensor” on the
front/rear side work correctly?
3. Replace the “SA, Ribbon Sensor”
on the front/rear side.
4. Failure in the control circuit.
4. Replace the “SA, Ribbon PCB” or
the “SA, Main PCB”.
1. Is the connector of the “SA, Ribbon
Sensor” on the rear side firmly
connected to the “SA, Ribbon PCB”
(J105)?
1. Connect it firmly.
2. Does the “SA, Ribbon Sensor” on the
rear side work correctly?
2. Replace the “SA, Ribbon Sensor”
on the rear side.
3. Failure in the control circuit.
3. Replace the “SA, Ribbon PCB” or
the “SA, Main PCB”.
4-10
Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Label on liner or
notch of tag is not
detected.
(Transparent sensor
problem)
Checks
Remedies
1. Is the Media Sensor menu setting
correct?
1. Set it to “See Through”.
2. Does the marker of Transparent Sensor
match with that of the bottom sensor
(Reflective Sensor)?
2. They match each other unless they
are reassembled incorrectly.
Correct them.
Note: Refer to Chap. 3
"Disassembly and Maintenance".
3. Is the sensor adjustment performed
against media to be used?
3. Perform the sensor adjustment.
See “2-3-2 (1-1) Sensor
Adjustment mode”.
4. Is the “FFC, TRA Sensor” (flexible
cable) firmly connected between the
“SA TRA Sen PCB” and the “SA, Main
PCB” (J9)?
4. Connect it firmly.
5. Is the “FFC, TRA Sensor” (flexible
cable) inserted correctly (not upside
down) on the “SA, Main PCB” (J9)?
5. Insert it in the correct direction.
6. Is the “SA, Ref Sensor Cable” firmly
connected between the “SA Ref Sen
PCB” and the “SA, Main PCB” (J8)?
6. Connect it firmly.
7. Is dust on the LEDs of the Reflective
Sensor?
7. Clean the LEDs to remove dust.
or
Paper end is not
detected.
8. Failure in the Transparent Sensor or the 8. Replace the “SA TRA Sen PCB” or
the “SA Ref Sen PCB”.
Reflective Sensor.
9. Failure in the control circuit.
9. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.
Black mark on tag is
not detected.
(Reflective sensor
problem)
1. Is the Media Sensor menu correct?
1. Set it to “Reflect”.
2. Does the Reflective Sensor match with
the black mark?
2. Match them.
or
3. Is the sensor adjustment is performed
against media to be used?
3. Perform the sensor adjustment.
See “2-3-2 (1-1) Sensor
Adjustment mode”.
4. Is the “SA, Ref Sensor Cable” firmly
connected between the “SA Ref Sen
PCB” and the “SA, Main PCB” (J8)?
4. Connect it firmly.
5. Is dust on the LEDs or photo transistor
of the Reflective Sensor?
5. Clean the LEDs to remove dust.
6. Failure in the Reflective Sensor.
6. Replace the “SA Ref Sen PCB”.
7. Failure in the control circuit.
7. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.
Paper end is not
detected.
4-11
CL-S6621
Troubleshooting
Symptoms
Checks
Remedies
Paper near end alarm 1. Are the following Paper Near End
menus set correct in the Menu
does not occur for roll
Settings?
paper.
Paper Near End Status: ON
Paper Near End Alarm: ON (by default,
this is set to OFF)
1. Set the Paper Near End menus
correctly.
2. Is the connector of “SA PNE Sensor”
firmly connected to the “SA, Main PCB”
(J12)?
2. Connect it firmly.
3. Failure in the PNE Sensor circuit or
cable.
3. Replace the “SA PNE Sensor”.
4. Failure in the control circuit.
4. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.
4-2-6. Operation Panel Problems
Symptoms
Nothing is displayed
on the LED.
No key works.
CL-S6621
Checks
Remedies
1. Is the “Cable, Opepane” (flexible cable) 1. Connect it firmly.
connected between the “SA, Main PCB”
(J4) and the “SA, Opepane PCB”
firmly?
2. Is the “Cable, Opepane” (flexible cable)
inserted in a wrong direction?
2. Insert it in the correct direction.
3. Failure in the “SA, Opepane PCB”.
3. Replace the “SA, Opepane PCB”.
4. Failure in the control circuit.
4. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.
1. Is the “Cable, Opepane” (flexible cable) 1. Connect it firmly.
connected between the “SA, Main PCB”
(J4) and the “SA, Opepane PCB”
(CN301) firmly?
2. Is the “Cable, Opepane” (flexible cable)
inserted in a wrong direction?
2. Insert it in the correct direction.
3. Failure in the “SA, Opepane PCB”.
3. Replace the “SA, Opepane PCB”.
4. Failure in the control circuit.
4. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.
4-12
Troubleshooting
4-2-7. Connector Location
[SA, Main PCB]
To SA PNE Sensor
To SA TRA Sen PCB
To SA Ref Sen PCB
To SA, Head Up Switch
J12
SA, Main PCB
J8
J202
RS232C
(J10) (J13)
J9
J11
(J14)
J16
J17
To SA PF Motor
J7
J5
J18
J201
SA, Relay PCB
To SA, Head
(for signals)
J6
J3
J4
USB2.0
To SA PF Motor
(for thermistor)
To SA, Head
(for power)
J19
To SA, Ribbon PCB
J15
To Unit, Power Supply
To optional I/F PCB (Option)
To SA, Opepane PCB
[SA, Ribbon PCB]
To SA Ribbon Motor F
To SA Ribbon Motor F
(for thermistor)
To SA, Fan
J106
To SA Ribbon Motor R
To SA, Ribbon Sensor
(on the rear side)
J107
J101
J103
SA, Ribbon PCB
J105
J104
To SA, Ribbon Sensor
(on the front side)
J102
To SA, Main PCB
4-13
CL-S6621
CHAPTER 5
PARTS LISTS
5-1
CL-S6621
CHAPTER 5
PARTS LIST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Recommended Spare Parts List .............................................................................................. 5-3
Mechanical Section
General Assembly (Drawing No. 1) ................................................................................ 5-5
Unit, Base (Drawing No. 2) ............................................................................................. 5-9
Unit, Mechanism (Drawing No. 3)................................................................................... 5-14
Unit, Head (Drawing No. 4)............................................................................................. 5-17
Unit, PF (Drawing No. 5)................................................................................................. 5-21
Unit, Sensor U (Drawing No. 6) ...................................................................................... 5-26
Unit, Control Panel (Drawing No. 7) ............................................................................... 5-30
Unit, Ribbon (Drawing No. 8).......................................................................................... 5-33
SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan (Drawing No. 9)........................................................................... 5-37
Accessories (Drawing No. 10) ........................................................................................ 5-40
CL-S6621
5-2
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
CL-S6621
Recommended Spare Parts List
Revision Up List
CL-S6621
5-3
Sheet No.
Rev. No.
Date
1/1
0
Mar. 12, 2013
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
Item
No.
Location
TITLE: Recommended Spare Parts List
Part No.
Q'ty/
Unit
Part Name
SA, Main PCB (200ENG)
Maint. Class
Worn
Casual
Sheet No. 1/1
Rev. No. 0
Remarks
1
2-12
PPS00058-0
2
2-23-1
PWT20005-0 Unit, Power Supply (100V)
1
For CSA
3
2-23-2
PWT20006-0 Unit, Power Supply (200V)
1
For CSE/China
4
3-5
PPK90007-0
1
5
4-12
PPM80005-0 SA, Head
1
6
5-12
JM66730-1
SA Ref Sen PCB
1
7
5-28
PF80003-0
SA PF Motor
1
8
6-9
JM66725-0
SA TRA Sen PCB
1
9
8-2
PPS00059-0
SA, Ribbon PCB
1
10
8-3
PWF80014-0 SA Ribbon Motor R
1
11
8-5
PPF80004-0
SA Ribbon Motor F
1
12
816
PPS90020-0
SA, Ribbon Sensor
2
@
1
SA2 Platen
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
5-4
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
CL-S6621
Drawing No. 1
Parts List & Location for General Assembly
Revision Up List
Sheet No. Rev. No.
CL-S6621
5-5
Date
1/2
0
Mar. 12, 2013
2/2
0
Mar. 12, 2013
DRAWING NO. 1
General Assembly (Rev. 0)
2
3
6
9
1
7
11
10
12
5
8
13
9
19-1
19-2
18-1
18-2
3
4
15
14
16
20
17
9
5-6
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
TITLE: General Assembly
Sheet No. 1/2
Drawing No. 1
Location
Part Name
Part No.
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
Remarks
1-1
Cover Top (BK)
PBA00062-0
1
-2
Label CL-S6621
PRX30043-0
1
-3
Window Side
JM56224-1
2
-4
Window
JM56209-0
1
-5
Logo Citizen L
PAX30002-0
1
-6
Screw, PH, M5.0x15 (NI)
E00150-150WF
1
-7
Damper Cover
PWG40004-0
1
-8
Nut, (#3), M5 (NI)
E40250-000WF
1
-9
Screw, PHT (PT2T), M3.0x14
E10130-140F
11
-10
Cover Connector (BK)
PBA00064-0
1
-11
Cover Front (BK)
PBA00065-0
1
-12
Screw, BH, M3.0x4 (NI)
E00530-040WF
1
-13
Cover Cable
PBA00058-0
1
-14
SA, Ribbon Holder
PPM40001-0
2
-15
Case U (BK)
PBA00061-0
1
-16
Support Top Cover (BK)
PBA00063-0
1
-17
Label, Main Guidance
PRX30059-0
1
-18-1
Label Rating JS12 US
PRX00020-0
1
For CSA
-18-2
Label Rating JS12 EU
PRX00021-0
1
For CSE/China/Korea
-19-1
Label Caution North EU
PRX10006-0
1
For CSE
CL-S6621
5-7
@
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
TITLE: General Assembly
Sheet No. 2/2
Drawing No. 1
Location
1-19-2
-20
Part Name
Part No.
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
Label Caution (China)
FB99985-0
1
Label Caution Cover Open
PRX10014-0
1
5-8
Remarks
@
For China
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
CL-S6621
Drawing No. 2
Parts List & Location for Unit, Base
Revision Up List
Sheet No. Rev. No.
CL-S6621
5-9
Date
1/3
0
Mar. 12, 2013
2/3
0
Mar. 12, 2013
3/3
0
Mar. 12, 2013
DRAWING NO. 2
Unit, Base (Rev. 0)
5
(DRAW NO.8)
1
29
28
36
4
29
32
33
35
7
29
38
6
29
29
8
12
10
29
34
29
15
30
30
29
35
13
16
29
29
17
(DRAW NO.7)
18
29
2
22
14
37
19
2
29
11
9
2
29
40
24
23
29
3
(DRAW NO.3)
26
39
19
25
20
19
27
21
31
19
5-10
31
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
TITLE: Unit, Base
Sheet No. 1/3
Drawing No. 2
Location
2-1
Part Name
Unit, Ribbon
Part No.
-
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
1
-2
Wire Tie
-3
Unit, Mechanism
-4
Plate Inlet
PAC70027-0
1
-5
SA, Power SW Cable
PPS30023-0
1
-6
Holder PNE
PAE00026-0
1
-7
SA PNE Sensor
PPS90021-0
1
-8
Cover Main PCB
PAC70029-0
1
-9
SA, Relay PCB
PPS00060-0
1
-10
Spacer (M3 H20mm)
PCH40003-0
2
-11
Plate, I/F Cover
TA54107-1
1
-12
SA, Main PCB (200ENG)
PPS00058-0
1
-13
Sheet Insulation Main PCB
PRC00008-0
1
-14
Plate Main PCB
PAC70028-0
1
-15
Plate Earth
PAC70030-0
1
-16
Cushion, Ope-Pane Cable
JM59903-0
1
-17
Cable, Opepane
JM67900-1
1
-18
Unit, Control Panel
-19
Leg Case L R
JM59901-0
4
-20
Case L (BK)
PBA00056-0
1
CL-S6621
C6701-003#
-
1
5-11
(Ref. Drawing No. 8)
4
1
-
Remarks
(Ref. Drawing No. 3)
(Ref. Drawing No. 7)
@
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
TITLE: Unit, Base
Sheet No. 2/3
Drawing No. 2
Location
Part Name
Part No.
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
Remarks
2-21
Case Power PCB
PBA00057-0
1
-22
SA Power Cable
PPS30019-0
1
-23-1
Unit, Power Supply (100V)
PWT20005-0
1
For CSA
-23-2
Unit, Power Supply (200V)
PWT20006-0
1
For CSE/China/Korea
-24
Cover Power PCB
PAC70032-0
1
-25
Sheet Insulation Power PCB
PRC00006-0
1
-26
Spacer (fai3.5 7xL4mm)
PWH10002-0
1
-27
Plate Power PCB
PAC70031-0
1
-28-1
Label Inlet Volt (100-120)
PRX30001-0
1
For CSA
-28-2
Label Inlet Volt (200-240)
PRX30002-0
1
For CSE/China/Korea
-29
Screw, BH, M3.0x4 (NI)
E00530-040WF
29
-30
Screw, PHT (PT2T), M3.0x14
E10130-140F
5
-31
Screw, BH (N), M3.0x6 (NI)
E00530-060WF
4
-32
Screw, PH, M2.0x4
E00120-040F
2
-33
Screw, BH, M4.0x5 (NI)
E00540-050WF
1
-34
Lock Screw (Inch)
C6390-071#
2
-35
Screw, PHT (#2), M3.0x6
E10130-060F
4
-36
Screw, FH, M3.0x6
E00230-060F
2
-37
Nut, (#3), M4
E40140-000F
1
-38
Washer, Ext.T, 4 (NI)
E50740-000WF
1
5-12
@
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
TITLE: Unit, Base
Sheet No. 3/3
Drawing No. 2
Location
Part Name
Part No.
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
2-39
Leaf Case U
PAG60010-0
1
-40
Spacer PNE
PBH40011-0
1
CL-S6621
5-13
Remarks
@
CL-S6621
Drawing No. 3
Parts List & Location for Unit, Mechanism
Revision Up List
Sheet No. Rev. No.
1/1
5-14
0
Date
Mar. 12, 2013
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
DRAWING NO. 3
Unit, Mechanism (Rev. 0)
1
2
3
4 (DRAW NO.4)
6
5
7-1
7-2
7-3
12
8
10
11
9
2
2
13
16
15
(DRAW NO.6)
14
(DRAW NO.5)
CL-S6621
5-15
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
TITLE: Unit, Mechanism
Sheet No. 1/1
Drawing No. 3
Location
3-1
Part Name
Part No.
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
Remarks
SA, Ribbon Cable
PPS30018-0
1
-2
Screw, BH, M3.0x4 (NI)
E00530-040WF
4
-3
Plate Ribbon Cable Stay
PAE00027-0
1
-4
Unit, Head
-5
SA2 Platen
PPK90007-0
1
-6
Label 2, Caution, Head (AH50)
AH90935-0
1
For CSA/CSE/Korea
-7-1
Label 6, Caution, Head
AR99901-0
1
For CSE/Korea
-7-2
Label 7, Caution, Head
AR99902-0
1
For CSA
-7-3
Label, Caution Head
AM90901-0
1
For China
-8
Label, Head Adjust
JM99982-0
1
-9
Label, Head Balance
JM99981-0
1
-10
Screw, PH (SW+PW), M4.0x16
E00940-160F
1
-11
Shaft Head Holder
JM42007-0
1
-12
Spring Ribbon Unit Dumper
PHG60001-0
1
-13
E-Ring 4.0
E60340-000F
1
-14
Unit, PF
-
1
(Ref. Drawing No. 5)
-15
Unit, Sensor U
-
1
(Ref. Drawing No. 6)
-16
Bush Head Holder
-
1
PCE40003-0
5-16
@
(Ref. Drawing No. 4)
1
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
CL-S6621
Drawing No. 4
Parts List & Location for Unit, Head
Revision Up List
Sheet No. Rev. No.
CL-S6621
5-17
Date
1/2
0
Mar. 12, 2013
2/2
0
Mar. 12, 2013
DRAWING NO. 4
Unit, Head (Rev. 0)
28
12
1
27
3
4
8
5
6
10
13
17
9
27
18
7
2
14
25
22
11
26
28
15
1
19
27
26
32
31
30
5-18
21
24
20
27
16
29
23
27
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
TITLE: Unit, Head-TT
Sheet No. 1/2
Drawing No. 4
Location
4-1
Part Name
Part No.
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
Bushing Head
JM11201-0
2
-2
Plate Holder Head
PAE00023-0
1
-3
Spring Head L
PJG60045-0
1
-4
Plate Head Earth
JM14105-0
1
-5
Plate Head Balance
PAC70037-0
1
-6
Spacer Head Balance
PBH40009-0
1
-7
Spring Head R
PJG60044-0
2
-8
Wire Tie
C6701-003#
1
-9
SA, Head Signal Cable
PPS30017-0
1
-10
SA, Head Power Cable
PPS30016-0
1
-11
SA, Head
PPM80005-0
1
-12
SA Cover Frame
PPC60012-0
1
-13
Holder Guide Sensor U
JM14211-0
1
-14
Support Pop Up
PBC80029-0
1
-15
Cam Head Balance
JM19203-0
1
-16
Pivot Head Balance Cam
JM12201-0
1
-17
Cover Head Cable
PBC80023-0
1
-18
Spring Head Holder
PJG60051-0
1
-19
SA Head Adjust Lever
PPC70005-0
1
-20
Guide, Head Adjust (Spring)
JM14204-0
1
CL-S6621
5-19
Remarks
@
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
TITLE: Unit, Head-TT
Sheet No. 2/2
Drawing No. 4
Location
Part Name
Part No.
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
4-21
Cam Head Adjust
JM19201-0
1
-22
Base Head Adjust
PAC70035-0
1
-23
Bush Head Adjust
PBE40017-0
1
-24
Spring, Adjust Cam
JM13604-0
1
-25
Sheet Head Connector P
PRC00010-0
1
-26
E-Ring 3.0
E60330-000F
3
-27
Screw, BH, M3.0x4 (NI)
E00530-040WF
6
-28
Screw, PH, M3.0x10
E00130-100F
2
-29
Screw, PH, M3.0x6
E00130-060F
1
-30
Screw, PHT (#2), M2.0x6
E10120-060F
1
-31
Screw, NO.1, TFH (6-0.7), M3.0x6 (NI)
E04630-060WF
2
-32
Washer, Plain, 2.6x6.5x0.5
E50126-005F
1
5-20
Remarks
@
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
CL-S6621
Drawing No. 5
Parts List & Location for Unit, PF
Revision Up List
Sheet No. Rev. No.
CL-S6621
5-21
Date
1/3
0
Mar. 12, 2013
2/3
0
Mar. 12, 2013
3/3
0
Mar. 12, 2013
DRAWING NO. 5
9
49
6
45
43
30
5
45
45
45
30
7
2
3
11
8
45
4
1
Unit, PF (Rev. 0)
12
40
46
10
45
14
46
13
15
16
17
44
18
39
30
19
50
45
27
28
29
31
45
45
32
45
47 26
25
33
24
22
34
37
38
35
36
48
5-22
23
45
45
45
20
45
21
41
51
42
45
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
Location
5-1
TITLE: Unit, PF
Drawing No. 5
Part Name
Part No.
Sheet No. 1/3
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
Hinge One Way
PWG40003-0
1
-2
Shaft One Way Hinge
PCG80057-0
1
-3
Gear One Way Hinge
PFF00002-0
1
-4
Gear Reduction PF 1
PBF00032-0
1
-5
Gear Idle PF
PBF00034-0
1
-6
Gear Reduction PF 2
PBF00033-0
1
-7
SA2 Main Frame L
PPC60020-0
1
-8
Gear Bevel Joint Lead Screw
PBF00039-0
1
-9
Support PF Idle Gear
PAE00033-0
1
-10
Frame Main
PAC60031-0
1
-11
Holder Adjust Sensor L
PBE00033-0
1
-12
SA Ref Sen PCB
JM66730-1
1
-13
SA, Ref Sensor Cable
PPS30022-0
1
-14
Guide Paper R
PBM30020-0
1
-15
Spring Friction Sen PG
JM23604-0
1
-16
Plate Function PG
JM24117-0
1
-17
Sheet Blind
PRC80005-0
1
-18
Shaft Sensor Guide
PCG80045-0
1
-19
SA Main Frame R
PPC60011-0
1
-20
Holder, Guide Sensor L
JM44207-0
1
CL-S6621
5-23
Remarks
@
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
Location
TITLE: Unit, PF
Drawing No. 5
Part Name
Part No.
Sheet No. 2/3
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
5-21
Lever Head Lock
JM44203-0
1
-22
Spring Head Lock
JM43601-0
1
-23
Pop Up Cover Frame
PBA80002-0
1
-24
Spring Pop Up
PJG60052-0
1
-25
Guide Cover Frame Pop Up
PBA70008-0
1
-26
SA, Head Up Switch
PPT00007-0
1
-27
Plate Peel Guide
PAC70034-0
1
-28
SA PF Motor
PPF80003-0
1
-29
SA, PF Motor Cable
PPS30021-0
1
-30
Wire Tie
C6701-003#
3
-31
Cover Sensor Cable L
PBC80028-0
1
-32
Gear Lead Screw L
PBF00036-0
1
-33
Holder Screw L
PBE00034-0
1
-34
Shaft Lead Screw
PCG80046-0
1
-35
Pinion Sensor L
PBF00035-0
1
-36
Leaf Pinion Sensor L
PAG60005-0
1
-37
Carriage Adjust Sensor L
PBK00003-0
1
-38
Spacer, CR Shaft
NH19102-0
1
-39
Label Edge Mark
PRX30058-0
1
-40
E-Ring 4.0
E60340-000F
1
5-24
Remarks
@
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
Location
TITLE: Unit, PF
Drawing No. 5
Part Name
Part No.
Sheet No. 3/3
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
5-41
E-Ring, 2.5
E60325-000F
1
-42
E-Ring 3.0
E60330-000F
1
-43
E-Ring 1.5
E60315-000F
1
-44
Screw, PH, M3.0x6
E00130-060F
2
-45
Screw, BH, M3.0x4 (NI)
E00530-040WF
15
-46
Screw No.0 PHT (Bt#1) M2.0x3
E11920-030F
2
-47
Screw, No.0, PHT (Bt #3), M1.7x7
E13517-070F
1
-48
Screw, BHT (PT), M2.0x6
E12820-060WF
2
-49
Screw, PH (PW), M2.0x8
E00620-080F
1
-50
Spacer Guide Shaft
PRH40001-0
1
-51
Wave Washer 4x8xt015
E51440-001SF
1
CL-S6621
5-25
Remarks
@
CL-S6621
Drawing No. 6
Parts List & Location for Unit, Sensor U
Revision Up List
Sheet No. Rev. No.
5-26
Date
1/2
0
Mar. 12, 2013
2/2
0
Mar. 12, 2013
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
DRAWING NO. 6
Unit, Sensor U (Rev. 0)
7
15
2
8
9
18
17
1
5
4
3
18
23
24
18
10
11
6
14
12
16
13
21
19
20
22
CL-S6621
5-27
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
TITLE: Unit, Sensor U
Sheet No. 1/2
Drawing No. 6
Location
6-1
Part Name
Part No.
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
Guide Paper L
PBM30019-0
1
-2
Shaft Hinge Guide Paper U
PCG80047-0
1
-3
Spring Guide Paper U
PJG60041-0
1
-4
Spacer Hinge Shaft
PBH40008-0
1
-5
Gear Bevel Idle Sensor U
PBF00037-0
1
-6
Gear Bevel Lead Screw U
PBF00038-0
1
-7
FFC, TRA Sensor
PSS40010-0
1
-8
Holder Adjust Sensor U
PBE00035-0
1
-9
SA TRA Sen PCB
JM66725-0
1
-10
Cover Guide Paper U
PBC80022-0
1
-11
Shaft Lead Screw
PCG80046-0
1
-12
Guide Paper U
PBM30021-1
1
-13
Knob Guide Paper U
PBH20006-0
1
-14
Spacer, CR Shaft
NH19102-0
1
-15
E-Ring, 2.5
E60325-000F
1
-16
E-Ring 3.0
E60330-000F
1
-17
Screw No.0, TFH (PT4-0.5), M2.0x4
E15920-040WF
1
-18
Screw, BHT (PT), M2.0x6
E12820-060WF
5
-19
Screw, BHT (#2), M3.0x6 (NI)
E10530-060WF
1
-20
Leaf Holder Adjust Sensor U
PAG60009-0
1
5-28
Remarks
@
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
TITLE: Unit, Sensor U
Sheet No. 2/2
Drawing No. 6
Location
6-21
Part Name
Part No.
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
Nut, (#3), M2
E40220-00W
3
-22
Pin Guide Paper U
PCG80079-0
3
-23
Wave Washer 4x8xt015
E51440-001SF
1
-24
Polyslider
JN39901-0
1
CL-S6621
5-29
Remarks
@
CL-S6621
Drawing No. 7
Parts List & Location for Unit, Control Panel
Revision Up List
Sheet No. Rev. No.
1/1
5-30
0
Date
Mar. 12, 2013
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
DRAWING NO. 7
Unit, Control Panel (Rev. 0)
4
3
1
CL-S6621
2
5-31
5
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
TITLE: Unit, Control Panel
Sheet No. 1/1
Drawing No. 7
Location
Part Name
Part No.
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
Cover Ope-Pane (BK)
PBA00066-0
1
-2
Switch, CL-S
JM56253-0
1
-3
LED, Window
JM56208-0
1
-4
SA, Opepane PCB
JM66720-1
1
-5
Screw, PHT (#2), M3.0x6
E10130-060F
3
7-1
5-32
Remarks
@
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
CL-S6621
Drawing No. 8
Parts List & Location for Unit, Ribbon
Revision Up List
Sheet No. Rev. No.
CL-S6621
5-33
Date
1/2
0
Mar. 12, 2013
2/2
0
Mar. 12, 2013
DRAWING NO. 8
Unit, Ribbon (Rev. 0)
37
29
14
(DRAW NO.9)
1
34
9
34
34
28
17
2
21
6
27
20
19
34
8
11
36
22
35
15
35
13
37
35
21
39
34
37
7
38
24
25 26
25 26
37
30
23
20
19
33
18
14
37
15
24
39
18
7
12
16
35
6 33
23
5
9
35
35
13
4
10
8
36
34
15
3
31
37
34
40
32
16
17
15
5-34
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
TITLE: Unit, Ribbon
Sheet No. 1/2
Drawing No. 8
Location
8-1
Part Name
SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan
Part No.
-
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
1
-2
SA, Ribbon PCB
PPS00059-0
1
-3
SA Ribbon Motor R
PWF80014-0
1
-4
SA Ribbon Frame
PPC60013-0
1
-5
SA Ribbon Motor F
PPF80004-0
1
-6
Holder Tension Spring 2
PBE00036-0
2
-7
Spring Ribbon Tension
PJG60046-0
4
-8
Holder Tension Spring 1
PBE00037-0
2
-9
Interrupter Ribbon Sensor
PBC90018-0
2
-10
SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F
PPM10001-0
1
-11
Sheet Static Eliminator 6621
PRC10002-0
1
-12
Lever Tension Adjust F
PAC90006-0
1
-13
Shaft Tension Adjust
JM32011-0
2
-14
Cover Ribbon Tension Sensor
PAC80013-0
2
-15
Bush Ribbon Roller
PBE40018-0
4
-16
SA, Ribbon Sensor
PPS90020-0
2
-17
Plate Ribbon Tension Sensor
PAC70038-0
2
-18
Gear Reduction Ribbon 2
PBF00041-0
2
-19
Gear Reduction Ribbon 3
PBF00042-0
2
-20
Gear Reduction Ribbon 1
PBF00040-0
2
CL-S6621
5-35
Remarks
(Ref. Drawing No. 9)
@
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
TITLE: Unit, Ribbon
Sheet No. 2/2
Drawing No. 8
Location
Part Name
Part No.
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
Gear Idle Ribbon
PBF00043-0
2
-22
Gear Ribbon Shaft F
PBF00044-0
1
-23
Spring Ribbon Return
PJG60054-0
2
-24
Spring Ribbon Shaft
PJG60053-0
2
-25
SA, Holder R Shaft
JM31701-0
2
-26
Plate Ribbon Washer
JM34122-0
2
-27
Gear Ribbon Shaft R
PBF00045-0
1
-28
Lever Tension Adjust R
PAC90007-0
1
-29
SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R
PPM10002-0
1
-30
Holder, Ribbon Shaft
JN34201-0
2
-31
Holder 2 Tension Spring
JM34204-0
1
-32
Cover Ribbon Frame R (BK)
PBA00059-0
1
-33
Knob, Tension, Adjust
JM34207-0
2
-34
Screw, BH, M3.0x4 (NI)
E00530-040WF
14
-35
Screw, No.0, TFH (PT4-0.5), M2.0x4
E15920-040WF
10
-36
Screw, PH (PW), M2.0x8
E00620-080F
2
-37
Screw, No.0PH (4-0.3)M2.0x3 (NI)
E03920-030WF
10
-38
Screw, PHT (#2), M3.0x6
E10130-060F
2
-39
Polyslider,Knob-02
TZ44130-00F
2
-40
Label Ribbon Tension Adjust
PRX30073-0
1
8-21
5-36
Remarks
@
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
CL-S6621
Drawing No. 9
Parts List & Location for SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan
Revision Up List
Sheet No. Rev. No.
1/1
CL-S6621
5-37
0
Date
Mar. 12, 2013
DRAWING NO. 9
1
SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan (Rev. 0)
2
3
4
5
5-38
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
TITLE: SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan
Sheet No. 1/1
Drawing No. 9
Location
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
Part Name
Part No.
Cover Ribbon Frame L (BK)
PBA00060-0
1
-2
SA, Fan
JM68702-0
1
-3
Bracket Ribbon Fan
JM34116-0
2
-4
Washer, Plain, 3x8x0.5
E50130-005WF
4
-5
Screw, PHT (#2), M3.0x6
E10130-060F
4
9-1
CL-S6621
5-39
Remarks
@
CL-S6621
Drawing No. 10
Parts List & Location for Accessories
Revision Up List
Sheet No. Rev. No.
5-40
Date
1/2
0
Mar. 12, 2013
2/2
0
Mar. 12, 2013
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
DRAWING NO. 10
Accessories (Rev. 0)
3
4
5
6
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
7
8
2
9
CL-S6621
5-41
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
TITLE: Accessories
Sheet No. 1/2
Drawing No. 10
Location
Part Name
Part No.
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
Remarks
Cord Set (UL/CSA)
C6009-000#
1
For CSA
-1-2
Cord Set (OE Straight)
C6009-200#
1
For CSE, Korea
-1-3
Cord Set
C6009-300#
1
For CSE, Korea
-1-4
Cord Set (China)
C6009-800#
1
For China
-2
SA Paper Shaft
PPM30008-0
1
-3
Cover Shaft Paper
PBC80024-0
1
-4
Spring PNE
PJG60047-0
1
-5
Lever PNE
PBC90019-0
1
-6
Slider PNE
PBA80003-0
1
-7
Shaft Paper
PBM30022-0
1
-8
Screw, BHT (#2), M3.0x6 (NI)
E10530-060WF
2
-9
Flange Paper Wide
PBM30023-0
1
-
Cleaner, Head (KT-PJB12)
PWZ80001-0
1
-
Ribbon (B110Ti) 174x30 W/Core
PWM50004-0
1
-
Label Accessory LR1111 178x102
PXX60012-0
1
-
CD-ROM CL-S6621
PXY90001-3
1
For CSA, CSE
-
CD-ROM CL-S6621 (CN)
JN74939-4
1
For China
-
CD-ROM, Users (KOR), S621/631/6621
JM74950-2
1
For Korea
-
QSG CL-S6621 (ITA)
PXZ00065-0
1
-
QSG CL-S6621 (ESP)
PXZ00066-0
1
10-1-1
5-42
@
CL-S6621
Chapter 5. Parts Lists
PARTS LIST for CL-S6621
TITLE: Accessories
Sheet No. 2/2
Drawing No. 10
Location
Part Name
Part No.
Rev. No. 0
Q'ty/
Unit
-
QSG CL-S6621 (GER)
PXZ00068-0
1
-
QSG CL-S6621 (POR)
PXZ00067-0
1
-
QSG CL-S6621 (RUS)
PXZ00069-0
1
-
QSG CL-S6621 (FRA)
PXZ00064-0
1
-
QSG CL-S6621 (CN)
PXZ00071-0
1
-
QSG CL-S6621 (EN)
PXZ00072-0
1
-
Quick Start Guide (KOR) S621/631/CL-S6621
JM74949-1
1
CL-S6621
5-43
Remarks
@
CHAPTER 6
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
6-1
CL-S6621
CHAPTER 6
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Inter Connection ................................................................................................................... 6-3
SA, Main PCB (1,2/13) [CPU (1)] ......................................................................................... 6-4
SA, Main PCB (3/13) [CPU (2), DAC] .................................................................................. 6-5
SA, Main PCB (4/13) [ROM]................................................................................................. 6-6
SA, Main PCB (5/13) [RAM] ................................................................................................. 6-7
SA, Main PCB (6/13) [FPGA] ............................................................................................... 6-8
SA, Main PCB (7/13) [Head, Opepane]................................................................................ 6-9
SA, Main PCB (8/13) [PF Motor] .......................................................................................... 6-10
SA, Main PCB (9/13) [Sensor, Option] ................................................................................. 6-11
SA, Main PCB (10/13) [Power, Buzzer]................................................................................ 6-12
SA, Main PCB (11/13) [I/F (RS232C, Option)]...................................................................... 6-13
SA, Main PCB (12/13) [I/F (USB2.0)] ................................................................................... 6-14
SA Main PCB (13/13) [Ribbon]............................................................................................. 6-15
SA, Opepane PCB ............................................................................................................... 6-16
SA Ref Sen PCB .................................................................................................................. 6-17
SA TRA Sen PCB) ................................................................................................................ 6-18
SA, Relay PCB ..................................................................................................................... 6-19
SA, Ribbon PCB................................................................................................................... 6-20
SA, Ribbon Sensor............................................................................................................... 6-21
SA PNE Sensor.................................................................................................................... 6-22
CL-S6621
6-2
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
Inter Connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
LED x4
SW x4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
D
SA, HEAD (CL-S6621)
PWM80005-**
+3.3V
+3.3V
PRTLED
CNDLED
ERRLED
FEEDSW
PAUSESW
STOPSW
MODESW
GND
GND
GND
SA,REF SEN PCB
JM66730-**F
IED
IED
PTR
SA PF MOTOR
PWF80013-**
PI
1
2
3
4
5
SA,OPEPANE PCB
JM66720-**F
MOTOR
+3.3V
+5V
+5V
IED_K
REFOUT
PTR
1
2
3
1
2
3
+3.3V
TRAOUT
N.C.
+3.3V
TRAOUT
IED_K
CN401
PT301
CN101
SA, HEAD SIGNAL
CABLE
PPS30017-**
SA, HEAD POWER
CABLE
PPS30016-**
J3
C
VHD(+24V)
VHD(+24V)
VHD(+24V)
VHD(+24V)
VHD(+24V)
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
+24V
+24V
CUTCTL0
CUTCTL1
CUTHP
CUTTH
CPRTYP0
GND
GND
GND
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
HDDAT3
HDDAT1
HDDAT2
nHDSTB1
HDCLK
B.E.O.
nHDLAT
GND
GND
VDD(+3.3V)
VDD(+3.3V)
1
2
3
4
5
N.C.
GND
CPRTYP1
+5V
PEELSENS
J13
J10
1
2
3
4
5
6
+3.3V
+3.3V
PRTLED
CNDLED
ERRLED
FEEDSW
J401
+24V
+24V
CUTCTL0
CUTCTL1
CUTHP
CUTTH
GND
GND
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
PAUSESW
STOPSW
MODESW
GND
GND
GND
A
COM_A
/A
B
COM_B
/B
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+3.3V
RIDIA
IED_K
J14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
PWRSAVE
GND
GND
GND
GND
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
GND
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
GND
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
GND
+5V
PEELSENS
VR
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
+5V
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
DTR
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
J16
J15
SA, POWER
CABLE
PPS30019-**
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
AC/DC
CONVERTER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
+3.3V
TRAMON
GND
1
2
SELECT-IN/CST/pINT
AUTOFDXT/DSR
STB/OCI0
DATA0/DIPSW0/hEP00
DATA1/DIPSW1/hEP01
DATA2/DIPSW2
DATA3/DIPSW3
DATA4/DIPSW4
DATA5/DIPSW5
DATA6/DIPSW6
DATA7/DIPSW7
nPRIME
BUSY/RTS/pEP00
ACK/DTR/pEP01
FAULT/hINT
SELECT/PPON0
PE
DWSWout
USBHOST_D+
+5V
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
USB_D+
USB_DVBUS
TXD/SO/DIR
RXD/SI
SCLK
RESET
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
USBHOST_DS.GND
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
VCC
DM
DP
GND
1
2
3
J102
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(OPTION)
INTERFACE PCB
SA,POWER SW
CABLE
PPS30023-**
B
SA, RIBBON
CABLE
PPS30018-**
UNIT,EITHERNET(SEH PS114)
TZ66901-**F
SA,PEEL SENSOR
PSS90002-**
nRBENB
FANCLT_R
RIBSENS_A1
RIBSENS_A2
RIBSENS_B1
RIBSENS_B2
RBTMP
GND
GND
GND
J19
High speed
USB2.0
UNIT,PARALLEL I/F PCB
TZ66802-**F
UNIT, POWER SUPPLY (100V)
PWT20005-**
+3.3V
PNESENS
IED_K
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
+3.3V
+5V
VMT(+24V)
VMT(+24V)
RIBSTEP_A
RIBSTEP_B
RIBDIR_A
RIBDIR_B
RBMOTCU_A
RBMOTCU_B
J18
SA,EITHERNET E type I/F PCB
TZ66805-**F
PEELER UNIT
PPS10002-**
SWOUT
GND
C
UNIT, POWER SUPPLY (200V)
PWT20006-**
IED
PTR
J12
J11
J9
1
2
3
+3.3V
+5V
+5V
IED_K
REFMON
J17
RS232C
SA,HEAD UP
SWITCH
PPT00007-**
FFC, TRA SENSOR
PSS40010-**
J8
PFTMP
GND
SA, Main PCB (200ENG)
PPS00058-**
SA,CUTTER
CABLE
PPS30028-**
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
7
8
9
10
11
12
CN201
SA, REF SENSOR
CABLE
PPS30022-**
J7
J6
J4
N.C.
nHDSTB2
N.C.
N.C.
GND
N.C.
N.C.
HDTHM
N.C.
HDDAT4
N.C.
SA PF MOTOR
THM
PPS90022-**
SA, PF MOTOR
CABLE
PPS30021-**
CABLE,OPEPANE
JM67900-**F
J5
D
SA PNE SENSOR
PPS90021-**
SA,TRA SEN PCB
JM66725-**F
+3.3V
+5V
VMT(+24V)
VMT(+24V)
RIBSTEP_A
RIBSTEP_B
RIBDIR_A
RIBDIR_B
RBMOTCU_A
RBMOTCU_B
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
nRBENB
FANCLT_R
RIBSENS_A2
RIBSENS_A3
RIBSENS_B2
RIBSENS_B3
RBTMP
GND
GND
GND
MTR DRV
DC MTR DRV
A
MTR DRV
AC INPUT
Title
HOST
COMPUTER
CUTTER UNIT
PPN00007-**
Size
Inter Connection
Number
2
3
4
5
6-3
6
Revision
PPS00058-**
A4
Date:
File:
1
SA,RIBBON PCB
PPS00059-**
A
SA, CUTTER PCB
PPS00065-**
0.0
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
1/1
8
CL-S6621
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA, Main PCB (1,2/13) [CPU (1)]
4
5
16MHz
C2
15p/CH50
165
1M
D[15:0]
1
2
169
170
V3R3
C3
0.1u/B10
JIT1
JIT0
SSEL1
SSEL0
X2
SB
V
G
C
T13
R2
47
11
11
UDM
UDP
11
11
6
SCK0
RXD0/SI0
TXD0/SO0
T9
T11
T29
161
160
159
T16
T18
T20
155
154
153
T22
T24
T25
T35
T37
T40
152
149
148
147
146
145
T44
T46
T48
T50
T52
T54
25
24
23
22
21
20
T57
T59
T60
19
18
17
T64
T66
T68
T70
T72
T74
176
175
174
173
172
171
T78
T80
T82
T84
T85
T87
34
33
32
31
30
29
T92
T94
T96
T98
T100
T102
T103
T106
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
UDM
UDP
P10/UCLK/INTP10
DSC8002DI1(48MHz)
11
11
3,6
3
3,6
RXD1
TXD1
SCLK
DACCS
SDATA
C
6,11,12,13
2
3
12
6
13
5
RIBSENS_A2
R6
R7
UB2INTP1
PFINTP
6
V3R3
10
U2C
RA1
47k
9
RIBSENS_B1
1
2
3
4
MC74VHC126DT
13
8
13
13
MC74VHC126DT
U2D
12
RIBSENS_B2
*0
0
47
R4
0
6
6
HDREQ
HDACK
12
12
6,8
UBREQ
UBACK
PFCLK
12
UB2INTP0
6
ITV
6
6
11
11
11
10
CEREQ
CEACK
DSR1
DTR1
USBON
BUZZER
P50/INTP50/DMARQ0
P51/INTP51/DMAAK0
P52/INTP52/TC0
P53/INTPC00/TIC0/DMARQ1
P54/INTPC01/DMAAK1
P55/TOC0/TC1
PDH0/D16/INTPD0
PDH1/D17/INTPD1
PDH2/D18/INTPD2/TOC4
PDH3/D19/INTPD3
PDH4/D20/INTPD4
PDH5/D21/INTPD5/TOC5
PDH6/D22/INTPD6/INTP100/TCUD10
PDH7/D23/INTPD7/INTP101/TCLR10
PDH8/D24/INTPD8/TO10
PDH9/D25/INTPD9/TIUD10
PDH10/D26/INTPD10/INTP110/TCUD11
PDH11/D27/INTPD11/INTP111/TCLR11
PDH12/D28/INTPD12/TO11
PDH13/D29/INTPD13/TIUD11
PDH14/D30/INTPD14/PWM0
PDH15/D31/INTPD15/PWM1
PAL0/INTPL0/A0
PAL1/INTPL1/A1
P65/INTP65/INTPC10/TIC1
P66/INTP66/INTPC11
P67/INTP67/TOC1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
4
MC74VHC126DT
U2B
R3
T39
P20/NMI
P21/RXD1/INTP21
P22/TXD1/INTP22
P23/SCK1/INTP23
P24/SI1/INTP24
P25/SO1/INTP25
11
8
PFFLAG
11
RS_INIT
P72/DMARQ2/INTPC20/TIC2
P73/DMAAK2/INTPC21
P74/TC2/TOC2
P75/DMARQ3/INTPC30/TIC3
P76/DMAAK3/INTPC31
P77/TC3/TOC3
8
7
6
5
RIBSENS_A1
R5
1k
1
U2A
13
nGRESET
T34
P11/SCK0/INTP11
P12/RXD0/SI0
P13/TXD0/SO0
PCM0/WAIT
PCM1
PCM2/HLDAK
PCM3/HLDRQ
PCM4/REFRQ
PCM5/SELFREF/ADTRG
PAH0/A16
PAH1/A17
PAH2/A18
PAH3/A19
PAH4/A20
PAH5/A21
PAH6/A22
PAH7/A23
PAH8/A24
PAH9/A25
MC74VHC126DT
B
OPSW_1
4
9
U3
9
9
9
6,7
6,8
7
7
6,13
V5R0
C4
0.1u/B10
1
PEELSENS
5
2
3
V5R0
C5
0.1u/B10
4
OPSW_0
U5
6,9
1
CUTTMP
ANI0
ANI1
ANI2
ANI3
ANI4
ANI5
ANI6
ANI7
PCS0/CS0
PCS1/CS1
PCS2/CS2/IOWR
PCS3/CS3
PCS4/CS4
PCS5/CS5/IORD
PCS6/CS6
PCS7/CS7
V3R3
74VHC1G66
9
TRAMON
REFMON
HDTMP
PFTMP
VHDMON
HDRES
RBTMP
T113 R9
1
5
2
3
R10
100k/1%
2
4
74VHC1G66
REF
A1
A2
K
U4
NC
V3R0
T111
R8
220
20k/1%
4
13
AVREFP
AVREFM
3
5
28
T119
PCD0/SDCKE
PCD1/BUSCLK
PCD2/SDCAS
PCD3/SDRAS
RESET
uPC1093TA
V3R3
C6
0.1u/B10
U2E
VCC
A
GND
V3R3
14
C8
0.1u/B10
PCT0/LLWR/LLBE/LLDQM
PCT1/LUWR/LUBE/LUDQM
PCT2/ULWR/ULBE/ULDQM
PCT3/UUWR/UUBE/UUDQM
PCT4/RD
PCT5/WE/WR
PCT7/BCYST
V3R3
2
4
3
VDD
NC
VSS
OUT
U6
CD
1
5
S-1009C28I-M5T1U
nRESET33
T127
C7
0.047u/B16
7
6
15
16
156
MODE1
MODE0
PLLSEL
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
T3
T26
T4
T27
T5
T6
T7
T8
T28
T10
T12
T14
T15
T30
T17
T19
112
113
114
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
130
131
T21
T31
T23
T32
T33
T36
T38
T41
T42
T43
T45
T47
T49
T51
T53
T55
76
75
T56
T58
A1
74
73
72
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
T61
T62
T63
T65
T67
T69
T71
T73
T75
T76
T77
T79
T81
T83
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
58
57
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
T86
T88
T89
T90
T91
T93
T95
T97
T99
T101
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
44
43
42
41
40
37
36
35
T104
T107
T108
T109
T110
T112
T114
T115
91
88
87
86
T116
T117
T120
T1 21
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
T122
T123
T124
T125
T126
T128
T129
D[15:0]
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
4,5,6,12
RBDIA
HDINTP
PWRSAVE
HDUSW
CUTHP
SW0
CEINTP
UBINTP
6
9,10
9
9
7
6
11
SW1
SW2
SW3
RIBSTEP_B
nSTATUS
FANCTL_R
7
7
7
6,13
6
13
R144
R145
6,13
6
RIBSTEP_A
RIBINTP
C
FANCTL
A[24:1]
4,5,6,12
A[24:1]
V3R3
RA2
47k
RA3
47k
B
RA4
47k
11
CTS1
R11
T118
BLM15AG121
nROM1CS
nSDRAMCS
nCONFIG
nCS3
nGACS
CONF_DONE
nROM2CS
nUSBCS
4
5
6
4
6
6
4
12
SDCKE
BUSCLK
nSDCAS
nSDRAS
5
5,6
5
5
LLDQM/nLLBE
LUDQM/nLUBE
CPRTYP0
CPRTYP1
nRD
nWE/nWR
4,5,6,12
4,5,6,12
9
9
4,6,12
5
PNESNS
V850/ME2
Title
Size
A4
MAIN PCB / CPU (1) (1,2/13)
Number
2
3
4
5
6-4
6
Revision
PPS00058-**
Date:
File:
CL-S6621
*0
0
9
11
RTS1
MC74VHC126DT
1
D
1
2
3
4
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
V3R3
8
7
6
5
X2
164
X1
U1A
D
8
T2
X1
R1
7
1
2
3
4
T1
C1
15p/CH50
6
8
7
6
5
3
1
2
3
4
2
8
7
6
5
1
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
8
9
A
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA, Main PCB (3/13) [CPU (2), DAC]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
D
V3R3
1
2
3
4
V3R3
8
7
6
5
U1C
J1
RA5
4.7k
RA6
TRCDATA3
TRCDATA2
TRCDATA1
TRCDATA0
TRCEND
TRCCLK
DDO
DDI
DRST
DMS
DCK
C
132
133
136
137
138
139
8
7
6
5
T130
T132
T134
T136
T138
T140
T142
1
2
3
4
22
140
141
142
143
144
T131
T133
T135
T137
T139
T141
T143
RA7
8
7
6
5
1
2
3
4
T144
T145
T146
T147
22
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
TRCCLK
TRCDATA0
TRCDATA1
TRCDATA2
TRCDATA3
TRCEND
DDI
DCK
DMS
DDO
DRSTZ
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
*24FLT
C
R12
47k
V850/ME2
U1B
V3R3
B
EVSS
EVSS
EVSS
EVSS
EVSS
EVSS
EVSS
EVSS
AVSS
OSCVSS
V1R5
IVDD
IVDD
IVDD
IVDD
IVDD
IVDD
PLLVDD
26
55
84
102
134
157
167
V3R3
R13
47k
2,6
2,6
2
IVSS
IVSS
IVSS
IVSS
IVSS
IVSS
PLLVSS
27
56
85
103
135
158
168
R14
1k
B
V3R3
U7
12
11
10
13
SDATA
SCLK
DACCS
R20
*1k
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
C19
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
39
54
71
90
10 1
116
129
151
14
166
EVDD
EVDD
EVDD
EVDD
EVDD
EVDD
EVDD
EVDD
AVDD
UVDD
OSCVDD
C26
C25
C24
C23
C22
C21
C20
C18
C17
C16
C15
C14
C13
C12
C11
C10
C9
A
38
53
70
89
100
115
128
150
3
16 2
163
R21
*1k
3
4
7
8
DI
CLK
CSB
V FS
AO1
AO2
AO3
AO4
TM1 VDD
TM2
NC1 VSS
NC2
1
2
5
6
T151
T150
T153
T154
V3R3
9
C27
0.1u/B10
14
BH2227
A
Title
V850/ME2
Size
A4
MAIN PCB / CPU (2), DAC (3/13)
Number
2
3
4
5
6-5
6
Revision
PPS00058-**
Date:
File:
1
8
9
13
13
PFMOTCU
PSNSLED
RBMOTCU_A
RBMOTCU_B
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
8
CL-S6621
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA, Main PCB (4/13) [ROM]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
D
2,5,6,12
D[15:0]
2,5,6,12
A[24:1]
D[15:0]
A[24:1]
5
1
3
V3R3
C28
0.1u/B10
74VHC1G04
2
A20
U8
4
T155
V3R3
C
C29
*0.1u/B10
U11
T156
*74VHC1G32
R23
2
2,4,6,12
2,4,5,6,12
2
nROM1CS
nRD
LLDQM/nLLBE
nCS3
R24
0
R25
*0
U9A
10
9
16
17
48
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
13
A21
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A22
*0
26
28
11
T159
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
A21
U10A
D15A-1
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
45
43
41
39
36
34
32
30
44
42
40
38
35
33
31
29
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
V3R3
RA9
BYTE
RB
VPP/WP
RP
E
G
W
47
15
14
12
8
7
6
5
T157
T161
T162
T164
1
2
3
4
10
9
16
17
48
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
13
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A22
2
2,4,6,12
2,4,5,6,12
26
28
11
nROM2CS
nRD
LLDQM/nLLBE
47k
M29W640GB70NA6E
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
A21
45
43
41
39
36
34
32
30
44
42
40
38
35
33
31
29
D15A-1
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
C
V3R3
RA8
47
15
14
12
BYTE
RB
VPP/WP
RP
E
G
W
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
8
7
6
5
T158
T160
T163
T165
1
2
3
4
47k
M29W640GB70NA6E
J2
B
2,5,6,12
LUDQM/nLUBE
V3R3
T167
U12
4
5
1
C32
*0.1u/B10
V3R3
R26
*1k
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A2
A4
A6
A8
A10
A12
A14
A16
A18
A20
A22
LUDQM/nLUBE
LLDQM/nLLBE
nCS
nRD
D0
D2
D4
D6
D8
D10
D12
D14
A1
A3
A5
A7
A9
A11
A13
A15
A17
A19
A21
T166
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
V3R3
U9B
VCC
GND1
GND2
27
46
VCC
C30
0.1u/B10
M29W640GB70NA6E
GND1
GND2
B
V3R3
U10B
37
37
27
46
C31
0.1u/B10
M29W640GB70NA6E
V3R3
D1
D3
D5
D7
D9
D11
D13
D15
*50R-JMDSS-G-1-TF(S)
A
A
3
*74VHC1G04
Title
Size
A4
MAIN PCB / ROM (4/13)
Number
1
CL-S6621
2
3
4
5
6-6
6
Revision
PPS00058-**
Date:
File:
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
8
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA, Main PCB (5/13) [RAM]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
D
2,4,6,12
D[15:0]
2,4,6,12
A[24:1]
D[15:0]
A[24:1]
U13A
C
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
6
12
46
52
28
41
54
C35
39
15
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSS
VSS
VSS
C
0.1u/B10
UDQM
LDQM
18
17
V3R3
C36
nSDCAS
nSDRAS
CKE
CLK
RAS
CAS
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
1
14
27
3
9
43
49
0.1u/B10
2
2
37
38
33
NC
CS
WE
4
3
2
1
V3R3
U13B
C34
LLDQM/nLLBE
LUDQM/nLUBE
19
16
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
0.1u/B10
2,4,6,12
2,4,6,12
40
BA0
BA1
4
3
33
2
1 RA12
5
6
33
7
8
RA13
5
4
3
6
33
2
7
1
8
4
3
2
1
C39
SDCKE
BUSCLK
20
21
RA11
5
6
7
8
RA10
5
6
7
8
0.1u/B10
2
2,6
T183
T185
T168
T169
T170
T171
T172
T173
T174
T175
T178
T176
T177
T179
T180
T181
T182
T184
C33
nSDRAMCS
nWE/nWR
*0
*0
*0
0
*0
0
53
51
50
48
47
45
44
42
13
11
10
8
7
5
4
2
0.1u/B10
A24
2
2
R27
R28
R29
R30
R31
R32
DQ15
DQ14
DQ13
DQ12
DQ11
DQ10
DQ9
DQ8
DQ7
DQ6
DQ5
DQ4
DQ3
DQ2
DQ1
DQ0
C38
A21
A22
A23
A12
A11
A10/AP
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
C37
36
35
22
34
33
32
31
30
29
26
25
24
23
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
EM63A165TS-6IG
EM63A165TS-6IG
256Mbit SDRAM
B
B
A
A
Title
Size
A4
MAIN PCB / RAM (5/13)
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6-7
6
Revision
PPS00058-**
Date:
File:
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
8
CL-S6621
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA, Main PCB (6/13) [FPGA]
1
2
3
U14A
D
C
B1_1
B1_2
B1_3
B1_4
B1_5
B1_6
B1_7
B1_8
B1_9
B1_10
B1_11
B1_12
B1_13
B1_14
B1_15
B1_16
B1_17
B1_18
B1_19
B1_20
B1_21
B1_22
B1_23
B1_24
B1_25
B1_26
B1_27
B1_28
B1_29
B1_30
B1_31
B1_32
B1_33
B1_34
B1_35
B1_36
B1_37
B1_38
B1_39
U14B
C1
C2
C3
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
F3
F4
F5
G4
H6
J4
J6
K1
K2
K4
K5
L1
L2
L3
L4
M1
M2
M3
M4
N1
N2
N3
N4
P1
P2
P3
T186
T187
T195
RIBSTEP_B
2,13
B2_1
B2_2
B2_3
B2_4
B2_5
B2_6
B2_7
B2_8
B2_9
B2_10
B2_11
B2_12
B2_13
B2_14
B2_15
B2_16
B2_17
B2_18
B2_19
B2_20
B2_21
B2_22
B2_23
B2_24
B2_25
B2_26
B2_27
B2_28
B2_29
B2_30
B2_31
B2_32
B2_33
B2_34
B2_35
B2_36
B2_37
B2_38
B2_39
B2_40
B2_41
B2_42
B2_43
B2_44
B2_45
B2_46
D3:nLCDCS(PORT)
D4:LCDSI
T196 D5:LCDSCK
T198 E1:LCDRST(PORT)->LED_O
T190 E2:LCDBKL(PORT)->RIBTRG
T191
7
LED_O
T200
13
RIBTRG
T201
T192
T194
T202
F3:ASB_NMI
T203
T205
T207
T210
T213
T216
T219
T223
T225
T228
T232
T235
T238
T245
T247
T250
PFCLK
RIBSTEP_A
2,8
2,13
PFMD1
PFMD2
8
8
L3:PFPS
PFDIR
PFENB
IFRESET
8
8
11
CUTCON0
CUTCON1
9
9
VMTON
PFINTP
PFOFF
10
2
8
EP2C5
4
D[15:0]
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
C4
C5
C6
C11
C12
C13
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D 11
E6
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
G6
G7
G10
G11
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
A1
A3
A4
A16
A17
A18
A19
T211
T214
T217
T220
A2
T226
T229
D[15:0]
A[24:1]
2,4,5,12
A[24:1] 2,4,5,12
V3R3
R36
47k
nTEMP_ERROR 6,13
nTEMP_ENABLE 6
T236
R38
1k
R37
1k
5
6
U14C
C14
C15
C16
D13
D14
D15
D16
E13
E14
E15
E16
F13
F14
F15
F16
G12
G13
G15
G16
H11
H12
H13
J11
J12
K13
K15
K16
L12
L14
L15
L16
M12
M14
M15
M16
N12
N13
N14
N15
N16
P14
P15
P16
B3_1
B3_2
B3_3
B3_4
B3_5
B3_6
B3_7
B3_8
B3_9
B3_10
B3_11
B3_12
B3_13
B3_14
B3_15
B3_16
B3_17
B3_18
B3_19
B3_20
B3_21
B3_22
B3_23
B3_24
B3_25
B3_26
B3_27
B3_28
B3_29
B3_30
B3_31
B3_32
B3_33
B3_34
B3_35
B3_36
B3_37
B3_38
B3_39
B3_40
B3_41
B3_42
B3_43
2,6
nRESET33
nGACS
T197
R33
100k
2
2,5,6
2,4,12
BUSCLK
nRD
C40
1u/B16
1
2
13
4
Q
Q
A
B
15
14
RX/CX
CX
3
2,4,5,12
B4_1
B4_2
B4_3
B4_4
B4_5
B4_6
B4_7
B4_8
B4_9
B4_10
B4_11
B4_12
B4_13
B4_14
B4_15
B4_16
B4_17
B4_18
B4_19
B4_20
B4_21
B4_22
B4_23
B4_24
B4_25
B4_26
B4_27
B4_28
B4_29
B4_30
B4_31
B4_32
B4_33
B4_34
B4_35
B4_36
B4_37
B4_38
B4_39
B4_40
B4_41
B4_42
B4_43
B4_44
B4_45
B4_46
U15A
T188
T193
LUDQM/nLUBE
CLR
74VHC123
HDINTP
HDREQ
2
2
nGRESET
HDACK
ITV
2,11,12,13
2
2
T415
T230
T233
HD1
HD2
7
7
RIBINTP
LED_R
LED_G
2
7
7
T239
T241
T243
T248
T251
T253
T255
T257
T259
T261
nRESET33
2,4,5,12
LLDQM/nLLBE
T218
T221
2,6
HD4
7
HD3
7
13
13
7
7
7
7
10
RIBDIR_A
RIBDIR_B
HDCLK
nHDSTB
nHDLAT
C nH VON
VHDON
EP2C5
8
K6
K7
K10
K11
L7
L8
L9
L10
L11
M11
N6
N7
N8
N9
N10
N11
P4
P5
P6
P11
P12
P13
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
T13
T14
T189
T199
nSTROBE/OCIO
TXD0/SO0
11
2
DSWOUT
11
D
P5 : BUZZER_O
V3R3
T204
T206
T208
T209
T212
T215
T222
T224
T227
T231
T234
T237
T240
T242
T244
T246
T249
T252
T254
T256
T258
T260
T262
R34
47k
R35
47k
nSLCT-IN/CTS
nINIT/nPRIME
nATFD-XT/DSR
11
11
11
nFAULT
SLCT/PPON0
PE
BUSY/RTS
nACKNLG/DTR
TSNSCTL0
TSNSCTL1
TXD0/SO0/OBDIR
11
11
11
11
11
9
9
11
CEREQ
CEACK
CEINTP
DATA[7:0]
DATA[7:0] 11
DATA7
DATA6
DATA5
DATA4
DATA3
DATA2
DATA1
DATA0
C
2
2
2
EP2C5
EP2C5
V3R3
V1R2
U14F
VCCIO1_1
VCCIO1_2
VCCIO1_3
VCCIO1_4
VCCIO2_1
VCCIO2_2
VCCIO2_3
VCCIO2_4
VCCIO2_5
VCCIO2_6
VCCIO3_1
VCCIO3_2
VCCIO3_3
VCCIO3_4
VCCIO4_1
VCCIO4_2
VCCIO4_3
VCCIO4_4
VCCIO4_5
VCCIO4_6
VCCINT1
VCCINT2
VCCINT3
VCCINT4
VCCINT5
VCCINT6
GND18
GND16
GND15
GND12
GND11
GND9
G9
H7
H10
J7
J10
K8
K9
J9
J8
H9
H8
G8
6
V3R3
R40
4.3k/1%
nTEMP_ENABLE
R41
200
R42
510/1%
2,8
C41
1u/B10
0.35V = 100 degrees
Celsius
2,7
2
3
PFTMP
0.35V = 99 degrees
Celsius
1
6
5
HDTMP
nTEMP_ERROR
6,13
V-
8
4
C42
1000p/B50
BA2903SFV
7
2
3
B
V24R0
1
U17C
V+
BA2903SFV
U17B
0.35V = 100 degrees
Celsius
6
5
CUTTMP
V-
7
8
4
C49
1000p/B50
BA2903SFV
BA2903SFV
F12
D12
N5
L5
E11
M6
1
2
3
4
2
2
2
H2
H1
J2
J1
H16
H15
J15
J16
CLK0
CLK1
CLK2
CLK3
CLK4
CLK5
CLK6
CLK7
RA14
22k
M13
L13
J5
G5
nSTATUS
CONF_DONE
nCONFIG
2,3
2,3
SDATA
SCLK
V3R3
U14E
T265
MSEL0
MSEL1
nSTATUS
CONF_DONE
nCONFIG
nCE
TDI
TCK
TMS
DATA0
DCLK
TDO
F1
H4
J13
K12
V3R3
1
2
3
4
*0
0
V3R3
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
GND_PLL2_2
GND_PLL2_1
GND_PLL1_2
GND_PLL1_1
GNDA_PLL2
GNDA_PLL1
R43
R44
BUSCLK
H5
F2
G1
G2
8
7
6
5
VCCA_PLL1
VCCA_PLL2
VCCD_PLL1
VCCD_PLL2
C73
C72
C71
C70
GND26
GND25
GND22
GND21
GND20
GND19
GND24
GND17
GND13
GND4
GND8
GND7
GND6
GND5
GND2
GND1
GND23
GND14
GND10
GND3
2,5,6
M5
E12
L6
F11
8
7
6
5
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
V1R2
T16
T1
P9
P8
M9
M8
R15
J14
H14
B15
E9
E8
C9
C8
A16
A1
R2
J3
H3
B2
2
A
RA15
1k
T266
T267
T268
T269
TDI
TCK
TMS
TDO
Title
Size
EP2C5
A4
MAIN PCB / FPGA (6/13)
Number
3
4
5
6-8
6
Revision
PPS00058-**
Date:
File:
EP2C5
1
V+
BA2903SFV
U17A
C69
C68
C67
C66
C65
C64
C63
C62
C61
C60
C59
C58
C57
C56
C55
C54
C53
C52
C51
C50
A
V24R0
U16C
BA2903SFV
U16B
2,13 RBTMP
2,9
R39
22k
U16A
0.35V = 100 degrees
Celsius
T263
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
0.1u/B10
B
V3R3
C48
C47
C46
C45
C44
C43
B1
G3
K3
R1
A2
A15
C7
C10
E7
E10
B16
G14
K14
R16
M7
M10
P7
P10
T2
T15
CL-S6621
7
U14D
V3R3
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
8
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA, Main PCB (7/13) [Head, Opepane]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
V3R3
6
Q1
DTA114EM
nHCVON
D
V3R3
T270
R45
330/1%
T271
R46
D
D1
RB520S
1k
C74
*1000p/B50
V3R3
D2
RB520S
VHD
R47
2
HDRES
D3
RB520S
T272
30k/1%
R48
1k
C75
*1000p/B50
R49
2k/1%
2
VHDMON
J3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C
C
10k
6
LED_G
6
LED_O
1k
10k
R140 Q2
DTC114EM
B10P-VH
10k
6
nHDLAT
6
HDCLK
6
HD4
2,6
6
200
T281
T282
BLM15BD102
V3R3
R53
18k/1%
R54 100
C82
1000p/B50
HDTMP
nHDSTB
T283
V3R3
R55
22k
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
4
V3R3
1
2
3
4
SW0
SW3
SW2
SW1
RA17
8
7
6
5
J4
RA16
47k
T273
T274
T275
T276
T277
T278
T280
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1k
+3.3V
+3.3V
PRTLED(GREEN)
CNDLED(ORANGE)
ERRLED(RED)
SW/FEED
SW/PAUSE
SW/STOP
SW/MODE
GND
GND
GND
OPEPANE(CL-S521/621)
B22B-PHDSS
A
B
12FMN-BTK-A
1000p/B50
1000p/B50
1000p/B50
1000p/B50
HD2
HD1
HD 3
L1
R52
VDD
VDD
GND
GND
nLAT
B.E.O
CLK
nSTB1
HD2
HD1
HD4
HD3(N.C.)
HD6
HD5(N.C.)
THM
HD7(N.C.)
N.C.
THM
N.C.
N.C.
nSTB2
N.C.
1k
10k
R142 Q4
DTC114EM
C81
C80
C79
C78
6
6
6
C77
0.1u/B16
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
LED_R
8
7
6
5
6
J5
+
C76
47u/16
V3R3
10k
V3R3
B
1k
10k
R141 Q3
DTC114EM
A
HEAD
Title
Size
A4
MAIN PCB / HEAD, OPEPANE (7/13)
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6-9
6
Revision
PPS00058-**
Date:
File:
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
8
CL-S6621
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA, Main PCB (8/13) [PF Motor]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
D
VMT
U19
11
C85
0.22u/F50
C
+ C84
C83
VBB
100u/50
12
PFMD1
PFMD2
PFENB
PFCLK
6
PFDIR
2
3
PFMOTCU
R58
T286
PFFLAG
20k/1%
R59
1k
T288
B
T285
13
T287
R60
3k/1%
C93
0.1u/B10
R61
22k
R62
22k
6
T414
14
C91
0.22u/F50
1
2
3
4
5
6
T412
T413
V3R3
VDD
J6
+
C86
100p/100
C
2501P0600T
C92
10u/16
REF/SLEEP1
NC
SENSE A
SENSE B
5
19
SLA7073MPRT
10k
6
M1
M2
M3
CLOCK
RESET
CW/CCW
SYNC
FLAG
100p/100
T411
100p/100
100p/100
100p/100
100p/100
6
6
6
2,6
7
8
9
10
15
16
17
18
GND
1
2
3
4
22
23
20
21
C88
C87
C90
C89
OUTA1
OUTA2
OUTA1
OUTA2
OUTB1
OUTB2
OUTB1
OUTB2
B
PFOFF
10k
Q5
DTC114EM
V3R3
T289
2,6
PFTMP
R64
100
R63
8.2k/1%
T290
C94
1u/B10
J7
1
2
B2B-PH-K-S
A
A
Title
Size
A4
MAIN PCB / PF MOTOR (8/13)
Number
1
CL-S6621
2
3
4
5
6-10
6
Revision
PPS00058-**
Date:
File:
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
8
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA, Main PCB (9/13) [Sensor, Option]
1
2
3
4
5
6
V5R0 V3R3
R65
J8
PSNSLED
D
1.2k/1%
100
C95
*0.1u/B10
T293
5
R66
6
8
2
CCX-W125-05-SMTR
BM SENSOR (REF)
White
Q6
2SC5658
7
TRAMON
C96
1000p/B50
T295
4
3
R67
T292
2
REFMON
C97
1000p/B50
3
2
T298
R73
1
2
3
R69
43k/1%
R68
20k/1%
+3.3V
TRASENS
D
03FM-1.0BT
R70
39k/1%
LABEL SENSOR(TRA)
Wh i t e
T297
10k
10k
Q7
DTC114EM
T299
*100
R74
39k/1%
*BA2904
R75
100k/1%
10k
6,9
R76
62k/1%
T300
6,9
*100
TSNSCTL1
100
U20A
J9
T294
T296
6,9
R72
V3R3
U20B
*BA2904
R71
75/1%/2012
1
8
V5R0
1
2
3
4
5
T291
7
TSNSCTL0
10k
Q8
DTC114EM
10k
TSNSCTL1
T301
10k
Q9
DTC114EM
10k
6,9
TSNSCTL0
Q10 10k
DTC114EM
C
C
V3R3
V3R3
T306
2
R80
HDUSW
1k
R78
22k
T307
2
6
6
J11
1
2
C99
1000p/B50
RA18
1
2
3
4
CUTHP
CUTCON1
CUTCON0
V3R3
SWOUT
GND
T308
B2B-PH-K-E
2,6
HEAD UP SW
Blue
R81
CUTTMP
100
R77
47k
1k
C98
1000p/B50
T305
V3R3
V3R3
T310
2
OPSW_0
2,9,10
100k
PWRSAVE
2
2
R85
R86
CPRTYP0
CPRTYP1
C101
1000p/B50
10k
10k
B
R84
47k
Q12
DTA114EM
OPSW_0
OPSW_1
Q13 100k
DTC115EM
CUTTER
H
L
PEELER
L
H
N.C.
L
L
PNESNS
2
1
MC74VHC14
T315
T316
R89
1k
R90
C103
1000p/B50 47k/1%
R91
T317
120/1%/1608
1k
1k
C102
1000p/B50
B
V5R0
Q11
DTC114EM
R87
100k
V3R3
1
2
3
T314
2
B3B-PH-K-S
PNE SENSOR
White
OPSW_1
T312
R88
47k
2,9,10
Q14
2SJ625
100k
PWRSAVE
V3R3
Q15 100k
DTC115EM
J13
D4
RB520S
R92
R93
3.3k/1%
T410
10k
Q16
DTC114EM
2
PEELSENS
T318
T319
2.4k/1%
10k
N.C.
GND
CPRTYP1
+5V
PEELSENS
1
2
3
4
5
10k
V3R3
T321
R83
47k
10k
J12
T313
U21A
2
S10B-PH-K-S
CUTTER
V3R3
R82
47k
+24V
+24V
CUTCTL0
CUTCTL1
CUTHP
CUTTH
CPRTYP0
GND
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
T302
T303
T304
R79
8.2k/1%
T309
C100
1u/B10
10k
J10
8
7
6
5
V3R3
T311
VMT
T320
S5B-PH-K-S
PEELER
10k
2,9,10
100k
Q17
DTA114EM
PWRSAVE
CPRTYP0
CPRTYP1
Q18 100k
DTC115EM
CUTTER
L
H
PEELER
H
L
N.C.
H
H
J14
A
T323
U21B
2
RBDIA
4
3
MC74VHC14
R94
1k
C104
R95
1000p/B50 47k/1%
T322
T324
R96
120/1%/1608
T325
1
2
3
A
B3B-PH-K-E
Blue
Title
Size
A4
MAIN PCB / SENSOR, OPTION (9/13)
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6-11
6
Revision
PPS00058-**
Date:
File:
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
8
CL-S6621
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA, Main PCB (10/13) [Power, Buzzer]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
T326
Q19
DTC115EM
J15
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2501P0900T
Q20
UPA2734GR
3
2
1
T327
U22
R1243S001C
T333
2
7
8
4
+ C106
C105
T334
0.1u/B50
47u/50
C109
0.1u/B50
VIN
LX
CE BST
TSS FB
GND FLG
T328
3
1 T332 C107
5
6
0.47u/B16
L2
DS75LCB_100
R98
1.8k/1%
U24
R102
1k
T343
10
11
12
9
PVIN1
PVIN2
PVIN3
VIN
SW1
SW2
SW3
13
14
15
C
C117
1u/B16
1
2
3
7
FB
PGND1
PGND2
PGND3
EN
NC1
NC2
TEST
4
T339
D5
RB050L
L3
D
T330
R97
10k
R99
C110 + C111 16.2k/1%
4.7u/25 47u/50
R101
2k/1%
Q21
DTA115TM
T337
U23
T341
7
R103 0/2012
T342
VIN1
FB1
GND1
LX1
VIN2
FB2
4
R104
T344
R105
100k/1%
3
C112
22u/X7R10
C116
10u/X7R10
T346
1
9
R106
22k/1%
GND2
10
C
2.2uH
L5
2
LX2
R107
PAM2307AJEADJR
0/2012
V1R2
T348
C118
10u/X7R10
11
5
NC2
NC1
EN1
EN2
V1R5
T338
T345
2.2uH
6
12
0/2012
C114
10u/X7R10
L4
8
T347
6
16
8
V5R0
T331
R100
100k
T340
2.2uH
C115
100p/CH50
0/2012
C108
10u/X7R10
T335
T336
C113
22u/X7R10
T329
8
7
6
5
4
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D
2,9
PWRSAVE
V24R0
PAM2306AYPCB
4
Q22
UPA2734GR
3
2
1
R109
100k
R110
V1R5 T350
0/2012
V3R3
T349
C119
1u/B16
T351
C120
1000p/B50
100k
V24R0
B
1
B
R108
100k
100k
Q23
DTC115EM
8
7
6
5
T352
V24R0
V24R0
R114
100k
Q25
NP15P06SLG
T354
VMT
R115
100k
T355
6
A
10k
VMTON
R116
1k
Q27
DTC114EM
6
10k
VHDON
R117
1k
10k
C122
1000p/B50
T357
T356
BUZZER
100k
1
Q24 10k
DTC114EM
Q26
2SJ505S
2
4
1
2
4
C121
0.1u/B50
3
R113
T353
2
100k
10k
3
R112
VHD
T358
Q28
DTC114EM
A
10k
Title
Size
A4
MAIN PCB / POWER, BUZZER (10/13)
Number
CL-S6621
2
3
4
5
6-12
6
Revision
PPS00058-**
Date:
File:
1
2
+
BZ1
PKM13EPYH4002-B0
Mo t o r drive power and Head drive power control circuit
R111
1k/3216
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
8
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA, Main PCB (11/13) [I/F (RS232C, Option)]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
V3R3
C123
1u/B16
U25
19
C1+
4
T362
T363
D
Vcc
2
T359
C124
1u/B16
5
C126
1u/B16
C2-
2,6,12,13
13
12
15
10
TXD1
DTR1
RXD1
DSR1
TXD1
DTR1
RXD1
DSR1
T1IN
T2IN
R1OUT
R2OUT
1
20
nGRESET
T360
7
VC127
1u/B16
T364
D
T366
T367
T368
T369
T370
17
8
16
9
T1OUT
T2OUT
R1IN
R2IN
EN
SHDN
18
T361
J16
LP1
C2+
6
T365
2
2
2
2
3
C125
1u/B16
V+
C1-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
11
14
NC1
NC2
GND
ICL3222EIVZ
V3R3
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 DTR
21
22
23
24
25 INIT
V3R3
LP2
C128
1u/B16
U26
19
C1+
4
T373
T374
C
Vcc
2
T371
C129
1u/B16
C2+
6
2
RTS1
CTS1
RS_INIT
3
C130
1u/B16
T372
V-
7
C132
1u/B16
T375
C2-
T376
2
2
V+
C1-
5
C131
1u/B16
225AE25FGTBBA3
RS232C I/F
13
12
15
10
T1IN
T2IN
R1OUT
R2OUT
1
20
18
17
8
16
9
T1OUT
T2OUT
R1IN
R2IN
EN
SHDN
C
T377
11
14
NC1
NC2
V3R3
R124
R123
R122
R121
R120
R119
R118
GND
ICL3222EIVZ
V5R0 V24R0
300k
300k
300k
22k
22k
22k
22k
6 nSLCT-IN/CTS
6 nATFD-XT/DSR
6 nSTROBE/OCIO
6
B
V3R3
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
10k
T378
10k
Q29
DTA114EM
T379
R125
1.5k
2
2
U27C
2
U27B
UBINTP
SELECT-IN/CST/pINT
AUTOFDXT/DSR
STB/OCI0
DATA0/DIPSW0/hEP00
DATA1/DIPSW1/hEP01
DATA2/DIPSW2
DATA3/DIPSW3
DATA4/DIPSW4
DATA5/DIPSW5
DATA6/DIPSW6
DATA7/DIPSW7
nPRIME
BUSY/RTS/pEP00
ACK/DTR/pEP01
FAULT/hINT
SELECT/PPON0
PE
DWSWout
USBHOST_D+
+5V
USB_D+
USB_DVBUS
TXD/SO/DIR
RXD/SI
SCLK
RESET
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
USBHOST_DS.GND
TX25-40P-8ST
I/F PCB CONNECTOR
nINIT/nPRIME
BUSY/RTS
nACKNLG/DTR
nFAULT
SLCT/PPON0
PE
DSWOUT
UDP
UDM
T380
6
2
2
6
R126
20k/1%
C133
33p/50
74VHC132DT
V3R3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
DATA0
DATA1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
DATA[7:0]
DATA[7:0]
J17
R127
30k/1%
TXD0/SO0/OBDIR
RXD0/SI0
SCK0
IFRESET
74VHC132DT
U27A
2
USBON
A
R128
1k
T381
74VHC132DT
C134
2.2u/B10
U27D
V3R3
U27E
V
G
74VHC132DT
14
7
C135
0.1u/B10
74VHC132DT
B
A
Title
Size
A4
MAIN PCB / I/F (RS232C, OPTION) (11/13)
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6-13
6
Revision
PPS00058-**
Date:
File:
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
8
CL-S6621
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA, Main PCB (12/13) [I/F (USB2.0)]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
V3R3
X3
DSC8002DI1(48MHz)
C136
0.1u/B10
T382
V
SB
C
G
R129
47
D
D
46
56
57
58
59
nRD
LLDQM/nLLBE
LUDQM/nLUBE
nUSBCS
C
2
2
V3R3
2
2
R130
47k
UBREQ
UBACK
UB2INTP0
UB2INTP1
2
3
T391
R131
47k
2,6,11,13
4
5
6
7
8
9
44
nGRESET
MPBUS
RD_N
WR0_N
WR1_N
CS_N
24
D0
D1/AD1
D2/AD2
D3/AD3
D4/AD4
D5/AD5
D6/AD6
D7/AD7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
L6
C137
1u/B10
U28B
VBUS
DP0
DM0
VBOUT0
EXTLP0
OVCUR0A
OVCUR0B
INT_N
SOF_N
DREQ0_N
DACK0_N
DEND0_N
DREQ1_N
DACK1_N
DEND1_N
SD7
SD6
SD5
SD4
SD3
SD2
SD1
SD0
T385
T384
DP1
DM1
VBOUT1
OVCUR1
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
ID0
C138
0.1u/B10
BLM18KG471SN1D
D6
HZU6.8Z
41
40
39
30
31
33
34
L7
1
T386
T387
J18
2
4
3
DLP0NSN900HL2L
T388
T389
T390
2
2,4,6
2,4,5,6
2,4,5,6
2
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7/ALE
1
47
48
49
52
53
54
55
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
USBVCC
DM
DP
USBLGND
1
2
3
4
VCC
DM
DP
GND
SG 5
C
DUSB-BRA42
USB I/F
D7
RKZ6.8Z4KT
5
4
3
A[24:1]
XOUT
A[24:1]
XIN
2,4,5,6
23
T383
U28A
37
36
28
29
L8
BLM18KG471SN1D
32
R8A66597FP
RST_N
R8A66597FP
2,4,5,6
D[15:0]
D[15:0]
U28C
V3R3
B
1
C139
C140
C141
C146
10u/B16
0.1u/B10
0.01u/B16
1000p/B50
80
V3R3
VIF1
VCC2
GND9
GND3
VDD1
VCC3
GND1
GND4
GND5
B
35
C142
C147
38 1000p/B50 0.01u/B16
C143
0.1u/B10
V3R3
10
C144
C145
4.7u/10
0.1u/B10
11
V3R3
20
C153
C154
C155
0.1u/B10
C157
0.01u/B16
C158
1000p/B50
C159
21
C156
10u/B16
0.1u/B10
0.01u/B16
1000p/B50
22
C164
C165
C166
VDD2
25
C163
10u/B16
0.1u/B10
0.01u/B16
1000p/B50
R132
5.6k
T392
26
27
C148
GND6
C149
42 1000p/B50 0.01u/B16
45
C151
50
0.1u/B10
CL-S6621
2
3
4
C152
GND2
V3R3
VIF3
60
C160
VCC1
GND7
C161
61 1000p/B50 0.01u/B16
AVCC
C162
0.1u/B10
A
V3R3
VIF4
AGND
GND8
70
C167
C168
71 1000p/B50 0.01u/B16
REFRIN
5
6-14
0.1u/B10
4.7u/10
C169
0.1u/B10
Title
Size
A4
R8A66597FP
1
C150
51
VIF2
V3R3
A
43
MAIN PCB / I/F (USB2.0) (12/13)
Number
6
Revision
PPS00058-**
Date:
File:
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
8
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA Main PCB (13/13) [Ribbon]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
D
VMT
V5R0 V3R3
J19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
V3R3
C170
0.1u/B10
V3R3
R133
200k/1%
6
RIBTRG
1k
R143 T395
C171
1u/B16
2,6,11,12
C
U15B
9
10
A
B
7
6
T394
T393
V3R3
T396
2,6
CLR
R135 100
RBTMP
2
FANCTL_R
R134
8.2k/1%
T397
C172
1u/B10
74VHC123
6
RIBSTEP_A
RIBSTEP_B
RIBDIR_A
RIBDIR_B
RBMOTCU_A
RBMOTCU_B
74VHC1G00
RX/CX
CX
11
nGRESET
U29
5
12
Q
Q
2,6
2,6
6
6
3
3
nTEMP_ERROR
V3R3
U15C
GND
B20B-PADSS-1F
RIBBON
V3R3
16
43k/1%
43k/1%
43k/1%
43k/1%
VCC
C
C173
0.1u/B10
8
U21C
2
T398 6
RIBSENS_A1
RIBSENS_A2
MC74VHC14
U21E
11
T408 10
RIBSENS_B1
T409 12
RIBSENS_B2
1
2
3
4
T401
T402
T404
T406
1k
B
C175
C176
C177
C178
MC74VHC14
U21F
2
8
7
6
5
T399
T400
T403
T405
MC74VHC14
U21D
9
T407 8
B
2
RA20
5
1000p/B50
1000p/B50
1000p/B50
1000p/B50
2
R136
R137
R138
R139
74VHC123
13
MC74VHC14
U21G
VCC
GND
A
V3R3
14
C174
0.1u/B10
7
A
MC74VHC14
Title
Size
A4
MAIN PCB / RIBBON (13/13)
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6-15
6
Revision
PPS00058-**
Date:
File:
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
8
CL-S6621
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA, Opepane PCB
1
2
3
4
PRINT (GREEN)
5
6
ERROR (RED)
CONDITION (ORANGE)
7
8
POWER (GREEN)
D
D
V3R3
R302
360/2012
CN301
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
C
V3R3
T301
T305
T306
T307
T308
T309
T310
T311
T312
T313
PRTLED
CNDLED
ERRLED
FEED
PAUSE
STOP
MODE
R303
360/2012
T302
R304
360/2012
T303
R301
360/2012
T304
D302
310PT
D303
310DT
D304
310VT
D301
310PT
C301
1000p/50
C302
1000p/50
C303
1000p/50
C
12FMN-BTK-A
V3R3
FEED
R305
22k/1608
1
2
5
C304
1000p/50
SW301
3 TSW-16-10-T35
4
V3R3
V3R3
C305
1000p/50
R307
22k/1608
C306
1000p/50
1
2
SW303
3 TSW-16-10-T35
4
B
5
B
SW302
3 TSW-16-10-T35
1
2
4
5
R306
22k/1608
PAUSE
STOP
V3R3
R308
22k/1608
1
2
5
C307
1000p/50
SW304
3 TSW-16-10-T35
4
MODE
A
A
Title
OPEPANE PCB
Size
A4
Number
1
CL-S6621
2
3
4
5
6-16
6
Revision
JM66707-**
Date:
File:
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
8
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA Ref Sen PCB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
D
V3R3
C
C
CN501
1
2
3
4
5
D501
D502
GL100MN0MP
GL100MN0MP
TR501
PT100MC0MP
CHP1505-0101
B
B
A
A
Title
Size
A4
Date:
File:
1
2
3
4
5
6-17
6
REFRECTIVE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Number
Revision
JM66730-**
7-Nov.-2003
7
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
1/1
8
CL-S6621
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA TRA Sen PCB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
D
V3R3
C
C
CN401
TR401
PT4800F6
1
2
3
03FMS-1.0SP-TF
B
B
A
A
Title
Size
A4
Date:
File:
1
CL-S6621
2
3
4
5
6-18
6
TRANSPARENT SENSOR CIRCUIT
Number
Revision
JM66725-**
7-Nov.-2003
7
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
1/1
8
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA, Relay PCB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
D
J202
J201
SELECT-IN/CST/pINT
AUTOFDXT/DSR
STB/OCI0
DATA0/DIPSW0/hEP00
DATA1/DIPSW1/hEP01
DATA2/DIPSW2
DATA3/DIPSW3
DATA4/DIPSW4
DATA5/DIPSW5
DATA6/DIPSW6
DATA7/DIPSW7
nPRIME
BUSY/RTS/pEP00
ACK/DTR/pEP01
FAULT/hINT
SELECT/PPON0
PE
DWSWout
USBHOST_D+
+5V
USB_D+
USB_DVBUS
TXD/SO/DIR
RXD/SI
SCLK
RESET
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
USBHOST_DS.GND
C
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
V24R0
T201
T202
T203
T208
T209
T204
T205
T206
T210
T211
T207
T212
T213
T214
T215
T216
T217
T218
T219
T220
T221
T222
T223
T224
T225
T226
T227
T228
PGND
T233
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
T239
T240
SELECT-IN/CST/pINT
AUTOFDXT/DSR
STB/OCI1
DATA0/DIPSW0/hEP01
DATA1/DIPSW1/hEP02
DATA2/DIPSW3
DATA3/DIPSW4
DATA4/DIPSW5
DATA5/DIPSW6
DATA6/DIPSW7
DATA7/DIPSW8
nPRIME
BUSY/RTS/pEP01
ACK/DTR/pEP02
FAULT/hINT
SELECT/PPON1
PE
DWSWout
USBHOST_D+
+5V
USB_D+
USB_DVBUS
TXD/SO/DIR
RXD/SI
SCLK
RESET
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
+24V
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
P.GND
USBHOST_DS.GND
C
B
TX25-40P
TX24-40R-12ST
From Main PCB
To I/F PCB
A
A
Title
Size
A4
RELAY PCB
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6-19
6
Revision
PPS00060-**
Date:
File:
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
8
CL-S6621
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA, Ribbon PCB
1
2
3
4
19
24
6
T103
21
18
22
1
C104
R101
T109
T104
+
T105
T110
C108
C136
47u/50 0.22u/F50
SENSE1
20
0.1u/B16
0.22/1%/1W
0.1u/B16
0.22/1%/1W
T106
8
9
14
17
2
10
12
T113
T114
V3R3
C112
0.1u/B16
C111
0.1u/B16
FANCTL
SENS_A1
SENS_A2
SENS_B1
SENS_B2
RBMTH
MS1
MS2
SENSE2
STEP
DIR
ENABLE
VDD
RESET
SLEEP
15
T115
1
2
3
4
C110
R102
T112
23
V3R3
13
J107
+
C113
0.22u/F50
C114
10u/16
1
2
T111
RBMTH
REF
ROSC
VREG
3
16
D
B4B-PH-K-S
Rewind motor
B2B-PH-K-S
Thermistor
C115
0.1u/B16
T119
8
J101
C101 100p/100
100p/100
100p/100
100p/100
100p/100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
T101
T107
T102
T108
C107
C109
C106
C105
+3.3V
+5.0V
VMT(+24V)
VMT(+24V)
RIBSTEP_A
RIBSTEP_B
RIBDIR_A
RIBDIR_B
RBMOTCU_A
RBMOTCU_B
MOT_EN
FANCTL
SENS_A1
SENS_A2
SENS_B1
SENS_B2
RIBTTMP
GND
GND
GND
7
C102 100p/100
OUT1A
OUT1B
OUT2A
OUT2B
VBB1
VBB2
VCP
J102
D
6
U101
VMT
C103
0.1u/B50
V3R3 V5R0 VMT
5
CP1
CP2
GND
GND
11
7
4
5
T116
T117
R103
T118
T120
0 /2012
C116
0.22u/F50
C117
0.1u/B50
A4984SES-T
S20B-PADSS-1
C
C
U102
VMT
19
24
6
C119
0.1u/B50
C118 100p/100
OUT1A
OUT1B
OUT2A
OUT2B
VBB1
VBB2
VCP
T124
V3R3
C127
0.1u/B16
C128
0.1u/B16
T130
MS1
MS2
SENSE2
STEP
DIR
ENABLE
VDD
RESET
SLEEP
15
C120 100p/100
T126
C121
R104
0.1u/B16
0.22/1%/1W
T127
C126
R105
0.1u/B16
0.22/1%/1W
20
23
B4B-PH-K-S
Send motor
V3R3
13
C129
0.22u/F50
+
C130
10u/16
R EF
C131
0.1u/B16
B
J103
1
2
3
4
100p/100
100p/100
100p/100
100p/100
T128
T129
8
9
14
17
2
10
12
T121
T122
T123
T125
C125
C124
C123
C122
SENSE1
21
18
22
1
ROSC
VREG
3
16
CP1
CP2
GND
GND
11
7
4
5
T131
T132
T133
T135
V3R3
0 /2012
R106
C132
0.22u/F50
C134
0.1u/B50
A4984SES-T
B
C133
0.1u/B16
SENS_A1
SENS_A2
T134
T136
J104
1
2
3
4
B4B-PH-K-K
Rewind side sensor
V3R3
V5R0
1
2
T139
T140
T141
R107 1k
FANCTL
C135
0.1u/B16
J106
D101
RB551V
Q101
2SK3664
B2B-PH-K-E
FAN
SENS_B1
SENS_B2
T137
T138
J105
1
2
3
4
B4B-PH-K-R
Send side sensor
A
A
Title
Size
A4
RIBBON PCB
Number
1
CL-S6621
2
3
4
5
6-20
6
Revision
PPS00059-**
Date:
File:
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
8
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA, Ribbon Sensor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
D
C
C
PT501
+3.3V
SENS1
SENS2
GND
PS501
GP1S094
1
2
3
4
PS502
GP1S094
R501
120/1%/1608
PT_4P
R502
120/1%/1608
B
B
A
A
Title
Size
A4
Ribbon Sensor PCB
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6-21
6
Revision
PPS90020-**
Date:
File:
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
8
CL-S6621
Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams
SA PNE Sensor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
D
C
C
V3R3
PT301
1
2
3
PS301
SG2C05
SENSOUT
K
PT_3P
B
B
A
A
Title
Size
A4
Ribbon Sensor PCB
Number
1
CL-S6621
2
3
4
5
6-22
6
Revision
PPS90021-**
Date:
File:
A
Sheet of
Drawn By:
7
8
APPENDICES
AP-1
CL-S6621
APPENDICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A.
Mounting Diagrams......................................................................................................... AP-3
A-1.
SA, Main PCB .................................................................................................... AP-3
A-2.
SA, Opepane PCB ............................................................................................. AP-5
A-3.
SA Ref Sen PCB ................................................................................................ AP-5
A-4.
SA TRA Sen PCB ............................................................................................... AP-5
A-5.
SA, Relay PCB................................................................................................... AP-6
A-6.
SA, Ribbon PCB................................................................................................. AP-6
A-7.
SA, Ribbon Sensor............................................................................................. AP-7
A-8.
SA PNE Sensor.................................................................................................. AP-7
CL-S6621
AP-2
A.
A.
Mounting Diagrams
A-1.
SA, Main PCB
Mounting Diagrams
[Component side]
AP-3
CL-S6621
A.
Mounting Diagrams
[Dip side]
CL-S6621
AP-4
A.
SA, Opepane PCB
[Parts side]
[Solder side]
JM66930-01
K
D301
POWER ON
PRINT
K
CONDITION
K
ERROR
MOS CAUTION
MADE IN JAPAN
FEED
PAUSE
K
D302
D303
D304
STOP
A-2.
Mounting Diagrams
CN301
2
1
JM667
12
11
MODE
SA Ref Sen PCB
A A E
D501D502
TR501
C
K
K
A-3.
CN501
A-4.
SA TRA Sen PCB
E
C
TR401
CN401
01
AP-5
CL-S6621
A.
Mounting Diagrams
A-5.
SA, Relay PCB
[Parts side]
A-6.
CL-S6621
[Solder side]
SA, Ribbon PCB
AP-6
A.
A-7.
SA, Ribbon Sensor
[Parts side]
A-8.
Mounting Diagrams
[Solder side]
SA PNE Sensor
[Parts side]
[Solder side]
AP-7
CL-S6621